Instruction Manual for EMERSON models including: VSS, VSR, VSM, VSH, VSSH, Single Screw Bare Shaft Compressor

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH


File Info : application/pdf, 206 Pages, 46.98MB

PDF preview unavailable. Download the PDF instead.

vss-vsr-vsm-vsh-vssh-installation-operation-service-manual-en-7553432
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Single Screw Bare Shaft Compressor
Installation, Operation and Service Manual

Important Message

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING AND STARTING YOUR COMPRESSOR.

The following instructions have been prepared to assist in installation, operation and removal of VilterTM Single Screw Compressors. Following these instructions will result in a long life of the compressor with satisfactory operation.

The entire manual should be reviewed before attempting to install, operate, service or repair the compressor.

Only qualified personnel shall operate, install and maintain the equipment.

Qualified personnel shall be accredited by a local regulatory agency, which requires that they are continually scrutinized by an organization whose sole mission is to establish, maintain and assure that the highest industry standards are set and met in a continuous and ongoing basis. The credentials shall address topics ranging from plant safety, operating concepts and principles and operations through the basics of refrigeration compliance and PSM (Process Safety Management) requirements.

Follow local workplace occupational safety and health regulations.

A compressor is a positive displacement machine. It is designed to compress gas. The compressor must not be subjected to liquid carry over. Care must be exercised in properly designing and maintaining the system to prevent conditions that could lead to liquid carry over. Vilter Manufacturing is not responsible for the system or the controls needed to prevent liquid carry over and as such Vilter Manufacturing cannot warrant equipment damaged by improperly protected or operating systems.

VilterTM screw compressor components are thoroughly inspected at the factory. However, damage can occur in shipment. For this reason, the equipment should be thoroughly inspected upon arrival. Any damage noted should be reported immediately to the Transportation Company. This way, an authorized agent can examine the unit, determine the extent of damage and take necessary steps to rectify the claim with no serious or costly delays. At the same time, the local Vilter representative or the home office should be notified of any claim made.

All inquires should include the VilterTM sales order number, compressor serial and model number. These can be found on the compressor name plate on the compressor.

All requests for information, services or parts should be directed to:

Vilter Manufacturing LLC Customer Service Department
5555 South Packard Ave Cudahy, WI 53110 USA Telephone: 1-414-744-011; Fax:1-414-744-3483 E-mail: info.vilter@emerson.com; Web: Emerson.com/Vilter

Equipment Identification Numbers:

Vilter Order Number: _______________________Compressor Serial Number: _________________ Vilter Order Number: _______________________Compressor Serial Number: _________________ Vilter Order Number: _______________________Compressor Serial Number: _________________

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

i

Standard VILTERTM Warranty Statement
Seller warrants the products it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment from Seller's manufacturing plant or twelve (12) months from date of installation at the initial end users location, whichever occurs first. In addition, Seller provides the following extended warranties: (a) three (3) years from the date of shipment on single screw compressor internal rotating parts, (b) two (2) years from the date of shipment on reciprocating compressors and single screw and reciprocating compressor parts, and (c) two (2) years on all other parts on a single screw compressor unit. Such warranties do not apply to ordinary wear and tear. Seller does not warrant that the product complies with any particular law or regulation not explicitly set forth in the specifications, and Buyer is responsible for ensuring that the product contains all features necessary to safely perform in Buyer's and its customer's plants and operations. Buyer must notify Seller of any warranty claim within ten (10) days after such claim arises, otherwise Buyer waives all rights to such claim. Products supplied by Seller, which are manufactured by others, are not warranted by Seller, but rather Seller merely passes through the manufacturer's warranty to Buyer.
SELLER EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Unless otherwise agreed in writing, Buyer's sole remedy for breach of warranty is, at Seller's option, the repair of the defect, the correction of the service, or the providing a replacement part FOB Seller's office. Seller will not be responsible for costs of dismantling, lost refrigerant, reassembling, or transporting the product. Further, Seller will not be liable for any other direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special damages arising out of a breach of warranty. THESE WARRANTY REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ALL OTHER WARRANTY REMEDIES ARE EXCLUDED. Products or parts for which a warranty claim is made are to be returned transportation prepaid to Seller's factory. Any improper use, corrosion, neglect, accident, operation beyond rated capacity, substitution of parts not approved by Seller, or any alteration or repair by others which, in Seller's judgement, adversely affects the Product, shall void all warranties and warranty obligations. Further, Seller shall not be liable under the above warranties should Buyer be in default of its payment obligations to Seller under this Agreement or any credit agreement.

ii

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Standard VILTERTM 5/15 Warranty Statement
The seller extends warranty, from date of shipment, to a period of fifteen (15) years on all compressor bearings, five (5) years on all internal compressor parts and two (2) years on the remainder of the parts on single screw compressor units. If within such period any such product shall be proved to Seller's satisfaction to be defective, such product shall be repaired or replaced at Seller's option. Such repair or replacement shall be Seller's sole obligation and Buyer's exclusive remedy hereunder and shall be conditioned upon Seller's receiving written notice of any alleged defect within ten (10) days after its discovery and, at Seller's option, return of such parts to Seller, F.O.B., freight prepaid to Seller's factory. Expenses incurred by Buyer in repairing or replacing any defective product or any lost refrigerant will not be allowed except by written permission of Seller. This warranty is only applicable to products properly maintained and used according to Seller's instructions, the use of genuine Vilter replacement parts and recommended oil in all repairs and replacements has demonstrated adherence to a scheduled maintenance program as detailed in the Single Screw Compressor operating manual. This warranty does not apply to normal wear and tear, or damage caused by corrosion, misuse, overloading, neglect, improper operation, accident or alteration, as determined by Seller. Products supplied by seller hereunder, which are manufactured by someone else, are not warranted by Seller in any way, but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such products that the Seller may have from the original manufacturer. Labor and expenses for repair are not covered by warranty.
THE WARRANTY CONTAINED IN THIS SECTION IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES (EXCEPT OF TITLE), EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Any description of the product, whether in writing or made orally by Seller or Seller's agents, specifications, samples, models, bulletins, drawings, diagrams, engineering sheets or similar materials used in connection with Buyer's order are for the sole purpose of identifying the products and shall not be construed as an express warranty. Any suggestions by seller or Seller's agents regarding use, application or suitability of the products shall not be construed as an express warranty unless confirmed to be such in writing by Seller. The 5/15 Extended Warranty shall be applicable only if the specific maintenance guidelines as outlined in the technical manual are followed. This includes the compressor inspections, completing periodic oil analysis and the change out of the oil and oil filters, and related components as required with only genuine Vilter parts. The customer is required to keep a maintenance log and receipts demonstrating the use of Genuine Vilter parts for validation of a warranty claim, if requested.
Note: The 5/15 warranty applies to NEW compressors only, and does NOT include used or remanufactured compressors.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

iii

EC Declaration of Incorporation

We hereby declare that the following machinery is intended to be incorporated into other machinery, and must not be put into service until the relevant machinery into which it is to be incorporated has been declared in conformity with the essential requirements of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.

Machine Description: Industrial Compressor

Make:

Vilter

Type:

VSM / VSS / VSH / VSSH / VSG & VSSG Single Screw Compressor

Model Size:

97, 113, 127, 128, 145, 160, 180, 204, 222, 243, 152, 182, 202, 301, 361, 401, 501, 601, 701, 291, 341, 451, 601, 751, 901, 791, 891, 1051, 1201, 1301, 1551, 1851, 2101, 2401, 2601, 2801, 3001

Manufactured by:

Vilter Manufacturing, LLC.

The following transposed harmonised European Standards have been used:

EN ISO 12100-1: 2010

- Safety of Machinery - General principles for design-Risk assessment and risk reduction.

EN ISO 13857: 2008

- Safety of Machinery - Safety distances to prevent danger zones being reached by the upper and lower limbs.

EN349: 1993 + A1: 2008

- Safety of Machinery - Minimum gaps to avoid crushing hazards.

EN ISO 13850: 2015

- Safety of Machinery - Emergency stop equipment - Principles for design.

IEC/EN60204-1 (2016) - Safety of Machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Specification for general requirements

A technical construction file for this machinery is retained at the following address:

Vilter Manufacturing, LLC. 5555 South Packard Avenue P.O. Box 8904, Cudahy Wisconsin 53110-8904

Signed for and on behalf of Vilter Manufacturing, LLC.:

Last update: May 2019

Vilter Manufacturing, LLC. 5555 South Packard Avenue t P.O. Box 8904 t Cudahy, Wisconsin 53110-8904
001-414- 744-0111 t FAX: 001-414-744-3483

iv

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Table of Contents

Section Title

Page Number

Important Message.........................................................................................................................................i Standard VilterTM Warranty Statement ...........................................................................................................ii Standard VilterTM 5/15 Warranty Statement .................................................................................................. iii EC Declaration of Incorporation .................................................................................................................... iv

Section 1 · General Information

How To Use This Manual............................................................................................................................. 1-1 Additional Important Notes ....................................................................................................................... 1-1 System Unit Identification ......................................................................................................................... 1-2 Bare Shaft Refrigeration and Heat Pump Compressor Model Designations ................................................. 1-3

Section 2 · Theory Of Operation

Compressor ............................................................................................................................................... 2-1 Capacity and Volume Control..................................................................................................................... 2-1 Refrigerant and Oil System......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Refrigerant Flow............................................................................................................................. 2-2 Oil Life and Oil Flow ........................................................................................................................ 2-2 Control System .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4 Temperature Elements, Pressure Transmitters and Indicators ......................................................... 2-4 Critical Application Guidelines ................................................................................................................... 2-4 Alarm and Shutdown Readings .................................................................................................................. 2-5 Single Screw Package Requirements .......................................................................................................... 2-6
Section 3 · Installation

Delivery Inspection .................................................................................................................................... 3-1 Rigging and Lifting of the Compressor ....................................................................................................... 3-1 Bareshaft Compressor Lifting Points and Weights ...................................................................................... 3-1 Bareshaft Compressor Center of Gravity (Models 291-2101) ...................................................................... 3-3 Bareshaft Compressor Center of Gravity (Models 2401-3001) .................................................................... 3-4 Compressor Inspections Prior to Installation .............................................................................................. 3-5 Recommended On-site Tools ..................................................................................................................... 3-5 Compressor Mounting ............................................................................................................................... 3-5 Notice on Using Non-Vilter Oils .................................................................................................................. 3-5 Long Term Storage Recommendations....................................................................................................... 3-6
Long Term Storage Log................................................................................................................... 3-7 Stop/Check Valve Installation..................................................................................................................... 3-8 Piping ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-9 Flange Loads ............................................................................................................................................ 3-10 Slide Valve Actuator Installations Instructions .......................................................................................... 3-11
Installation ................................................................................................................................... 3-11 Overview...................................................................................................................................... 3-11 Actuator Motor Control Module Calibration Procedure................................................................. 3-11 Instrumentation Requirements ................................................................................................................ 3-12 Pressure ....................................................................................................................................... 3-12 Temperature ................................................................................................................................ 3-12 Miscellaneous............................................................................................................................... 3-13 Testing Refrigeration System For Leaks .................................................................................................... 3-13 Ammonia Systems ....................................................................................................................... 3-13 Halocarbon Refrigerant Systems .................................................................................................. 3-13 CO2 Systems ................................................................................................................................ 3-14

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

TOC - 1

Table of Contents

Section Title

Section 4 · Operation

Page Number

Notice on Using Non-Vilter Oils .................................................................................................................. 4-1 Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 4-1 Control System ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Starting, Stopping and Restarting The Compressor ........................................................................ 4-1 Emergency Shutdown .................................................................................................................... 4-2 Capacity and Volume Ration Control through Slide Valve Actuators ............................................... 4-2 Slide Valve Actuator Operation .................................................................................................................. 4-3 Calibrate Slide Valve Actuators (For Units Using Vission20/20TM) ................................................................ 4-4 Calibrate Slide Valve Actuators (For Units Using Compact Logix PLC)........................................................ 4-10 Compressor Control with Vission20/20TM Micro-Controller (No Slide Operation)...................................... 4-15 Suction Equalizing Line Setup - For VSS/VSM Compressors....................................................................... 4-16 Stop/Check Valve Operation .................................................................................................................... 4-17
Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Maintenance and Service Schedule - For VSS/VSM Unit Only ...................................................................... 5-1 Maintenance and Service Schedule - For VSH/VSSH Unit Only..................................................................... 5-2 Preventive Maintenance, Checks and Services ............................................................................................ 5-4
Daily............................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Weekly........................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Monthly ......................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Trimonthly ..................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Annually......................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Compressor Unit Isolation For Maintenance/Service (Compressors With Slide Valves)................................ 5-5 Recommendations When Servicing (Compressors Without Slide Valves) ................................................... 5-6 Preparation of Unit For Servicing................................................................................................................ 5-6 Compressor Unit Leak Check After Servicing .............................................................................................. 5-7 Oil Sampling .............................................................................................................................................. 5-7 Recommendations ......................................................................................................................... 5-7 Installation of The Oil Sampler Valve............................................................................................... 5-8 Pre-Sampling ................................................................................................................................. 5-8 Sampling Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Oil Sample Analysis Report ........................................................................................................... 5-10 Compressor Replacement ........................................................................................................................ 5-11 Removal ....................................................................................................................................... 5-11 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 5-12 Compressor Inspection ............................................................................................................................ 5-13 Compressor Shaft Bearing Clearance Inspections ......................................................................... 5-13
Determine Maximum Applied Force.................................................................................. 5-13 Main Rotor Bearing Axial Clearance Inspection.................................................................. 5-13 Main Rotor Bearing Radial Clearance Inspection................................................................ 5-14 Gaterotor Bearing Inspection ....................................................................................................... 5-15 Gaterotor Inspection .................................................................................................................... 5-16 A) Gaterotor - Main Housing Shelf Clearance..................................................................... 5-16 B) Gaterotor Float Measurement....................................................................................... 5-17 C) Gaterotor Backlash Inspection ...................................................................................... 5-18 Important Notes............................................................................................................... 5-19 Additional Inspections.................................................................................................................. 5-20 Post Inspection............................................................................................................................. 5-20 Gaterotor Assembly Replacement (All Compressors Except VSM 301-701 and VSM 97-127 Compressors) .................................................... 5-20 Removal ....................................................................................................................................... 5-20 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 5-21

TOC - 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Table of Contents

Section Title

Page Number

Gaterotor Assembly Replacement (VSM 301-701 Compressors Only)....................................................... 5-24 Removal ....................................................................................................................................... 5-24 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 5-24
Gaterotor Assembly Replacement (VSM 97-127 Compressors Only)......................................................... 5-26 Removal ....................................................................................................................................... 5-26 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 5-26
Gaterotor Disassembly (All Compressors Except VSM 97-127 Compressors)............................................. 5-28 Gaterotor Blade Removal.............................................................................................................. 5-28 Gaterotor Blade Installation.......................................................................................................... 5-29 Gaterotor Thrust Bearing Removal................................................................................................ 5-29 Gaterotor Thrust Bearing Installation............................................................................................ 5-29 Gaterotor Roller Bearing Removal................................................................................................. 5-30 Gaterotor Roller Bearing Installation............................................................................................. 5-30
Gaterotor Disassembly (VSM 97-127 Compressors Only) ......................................................................... 5-31 Gaterotor Blade Removal.............................................................................................................. 5-31 Gaterotor Blade Installation.......................................................................................................... 5-31 Gaterotor Thrust Bearing Removal................................................................................................ 5-32 Gaterotor Thrust Bearing Installation............................................................................................ 5-32 Gaterotor Roller Bearing Removal................................................................................................. 5-32 Gaterotor Roller Bearing Installation............................................................................................. 5-32
Compressor Shaft Seal Replacement ........................................................................................................ 5-33 Shaft Seal Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 5-33 Handling Seal Face with Care ........................................................................................................ 5-33 Compressor Shaft Seal Replacement - For VSS/VSM Units ............................................................. 5-34 Tools ................................................................................................................................ 5-34 Removal ........................................................................................................................... 5-34 Installation ....................................................................................................................... 5-34 Compressor Shaft Seal Replacement - For VSH/VSSH Units ........................................................... 5-36 Shaft Seal Removal Shaft Seal Removal - For Part# 25985Y and 25985YA .......................... 5-36 Shaft Seal Removal Shaft Seal Removal - For Part# 28985W and 28985WA ....................... 5-37 Prior to Shaft Seal Installation ........................................................................................... 5-38 Shaft Seal Installation - For Part# 25985Y and 25985Y ...................................................... 5-39 Shaft Seal Installation - For Part# 28985W and 28985WA ................................................. 5-40
Slide Valve Actuator Assembly Replacement ............................................................................................ 5-41 Removal ....................................................................................................................................... 5-41 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 5-41 Actuator Installation Using Anti-Rotation Bolts............................................................................. 5-42
Slide Valve Command Shaft Assembly Replacement................................................................................. 5-43 Removal ....................................................................................................................................... 5-43 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 5-43
Liquid Injection Control Valve Station (Danfoss ICF 20-40 Valve Station)................................................... 5-44 Main Rotor Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 5-46 Torque Specifications............................................................................................................................... 5-46 Using A Torque Wrench Correctly............................................................................................................. 5-47 Nord-Lock® Washers ................................................................................................................................ 5-47

Section 6 · Troubleshooting

Slide Valve Actuator Troubleshooting Guide............................................................................................... 6-1 Slide Valve Actuator LED Blink Codes.......................................................................................................... 6-4 Troubleshooting Guide - General Problems & Solutions .............................................................................. 6-6

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

TOC - 3

Table of Contents

Section Title

Section 7 · Warranty And Parts

Page Number

Warranty Claim Processing ........................................................................................................................ 7-1 Motor Warranty Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 7-2 On-Site Service Support............................................................................................................................. 7-3 Remanufactured Bare Shaft Single Screw Compressor Process................................................................... 7-3
Explanation of Rebuild Levels.......................................................................................................... 7-3 Bare Shaft Compressor Description ................................................................................................ 7-3

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

VSH/VSSH Recommended Spare Parts List ................................................................................................. 8-1 VSS Recommended Spare Parts List ........................................................................................................... 8-3
Gaterotor ....................................................................................................................................... 8-5 Shaft Seal ..................................................................................................................................... 8-11 Main Rotor ................................................................................................................................... 8-13 Slide Valve Cross Shafts and End Plate........................................................................................... 8-14 End Plate (VSS 2401 - VSS 3001 Only) ........................................................................................... 8-16 Slide Valve Carriage Assembly ...................................................................................................... 8-18 Actuator and Command Shaft ...................................................................................................... 8-21 Miscellaneous Frame Components ............................................................................................... 8-22 Miscellaneous Frame Components Tubing and Fittings................................................................. 8-25 Replacement Tools ....................................................................................................................... 8-28 Replacement Parts ....................................................................................................................... 8-29 VSM 301-701 Recommended Spare Parts List .......................................................................................... 8-31 Gaterotor Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 8-32 Shaft Seal ..................................................................................................................................... 8-34 Main Rotor ................................................................................................................................... 8-35 Slide Valve Cross Shafts and End Plate........................................................................................... 8-36 Slide Valve Carriage Assembly ...................................................................................................... 8-38 Actuator and Command Shaft ...................................................................................................... 8-40 Miscellaneous Frame Components ............................................................................................... 8-41 Housing Accessories..................................................................................................................... 8-43 Replacement Tools ....................................................................................................................... 8-44 VSM 97-127 Recommended Spare Parts List ............................................................................................ 8-46 Kits................................................................................................................................................ 8-47
Appendices

Appendix A Torque Specifications.............................................................................................................. A-1 Appendix B Vilter Oil.................................................................................................................................B -1 Appendix C Vibration Measurements - Single Screw Compressor ...............................................................C-1 Appendix D Liquid Injection Valve Setup Instructions and ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve Quick Start Guide ...D-1 Appendix E Liquid Injection Valve Station ICF 20-40 Installation Guide .......................................................E-1 Appendix F Hand-Held Slide Valve Calibration Tool ....................................................................................F-1

TOC - 4

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Table of Contents

Table / Figure

List of Tables and Figures

Page Number

Tables

Table 3-1. Bareshaft Compressor Component Weights............................................................................... 3-1 Table 3-2. Bareshaft Compressor Component Lifting Hole Sizes ................................................................. 3-1 Table 3-3. Maximum Allowable Flange Loads ........................................................................................... 3-10

Table 4-1. Command Shaft Rotation Specifications .................................................................................... 4-8 Table 4-2. Stop/Check Valve Open Positions ............................................................................................. 4-17

Table 5-1. Maintenance/Service Schedule - For VSS/VSM Unit Only............................................................. 5-1 Table 5-2a. Maintenance/Service Schedule (For VSH/VSSH Unit Only) ........................................................ 5-2 Table 5-2b. Maintenance/Service Schedule (For VSH/VSSH Compressor Only) ............................................ 5-3 Table 5-3. Maximum Main Rotor Bearing Clearance.................................................................................. 5-14 Table 5-4. Maximum Gaterotor Bearing Clearance.................................................................................... 5-15 Table 5-5. Gaterotor Float ........................................................................................................................ 5-17 Table 5-6. Backlash Range ........................................................................................................................ 5-19 Table 5-7. Gaterotor Tool Kits ................................................................................................................... 5-20 Table 5-8. Shaft Seal Tool Kits ................................................................................................................... 5-34 Table 5-9. VSH/VSSH Shaft Seals .............................................................................................................. 5-36 Table 5-10. Coils For Solenoid Valves (ICFE) .............................................................................................. 5-45 Table 5-11. Parts For Motorized Valve Station (ICF)................................................................................... 5-45 Table 5-12. Torque Specifications (ft-lbs).................................................................................................. 5-46

Table 6-1. Slide Valve Actuator Troubleshooting Guide (1 of 3) ................................................................... 6-1 Table 6-2. Slide Valve Actuator LED Blink Codes (1 of 2) .............................................................................. 6-3 Table 6-3. Troubleshooting Guide - General Problems & Solutions (1 of 3) .................................................. 6-5
Figures

Figure 2-1. Refrigeration Compressor Unit P&ID (Thermosyphon Oil Cooling with Single Oil Filter Shown) . 2-3 Figure 2-2. Basic Single Screw Compressor System..................................................................................... 2-6

Figure 3-1. Bareshaft Compressor Lifting Points and Component Weights ................................................. 3-3 Figure 3-2. Bareshaft Compressor Assembly Center of Gravity (Models 97-127) ........................................ 3-2 Figure 3-3. Bareshaft Compressor Assembly Center of Gravity (Models 291-2101) .................................... 3-3 Figure 3-4. Bareshaft Compressor Center of Gravity - Discharge Manifold and Main Compressor Assembly (Models 291-2101) .................................................................................................................................... 3-3 Figure 3-5. Bareshaft Compressor Assembly Center of Gravity (Models 2401-3001) ................................... 3-4 Figure 3-6. Bareshaft Compressor Center of Gravity - Discharge Manifold and Main Compressor Assembly (Models 2401-3001) .................................................................................................................................. 3-4 Figure 3-7. Stop/Check Valve Orientation................................................................................................... 3-8 Figure 3-8. Maximum Allowable Flange Loads.......................................................................................... 3-10 Figure 3-9. Additional Instruments........................................................................................................... 3-12

Figure 4-1. Slide Valve Motor Location ....................................................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-2. Actuator Assembly ................................................................................................................... 4-4 Figure 4-3. Slide Valve Calibration Screen (Vission 20/20) .......................................................................... 4-5 Figure 4-4. Menu Screen and Slide Calibration Button (Vission 20/20)........................................................ 4-6 Figure 4-5. Wire Connections For Capacity and Volume Actuators ............................................................. 4-7 Figure 4-6. Photo-Chopper ........................................................................................................................ 4-9 Figure 4-7. Actuator Assembly ................................................................................................................. 4-10 Figure 4-8. Overview, Main Menu and Instrument Calibration Screens (Compact Logix PLC)..................... 4-12 Figure 4-9. Slide Calibration Screen (Compact Logix PLC) ......................................................................... 4-13 Figure 4-10. Photo-chopper ..................................................................................................................... 4-13

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

TOC - 5

Table of Contents

Table / Figure

Page Number

Figure 4-11. Vission 20/20 Configuration Screen - I/O Configuration (Page 8) .......................................... 4-15 Figure 4-12. Compressor and Model Setup with Vission 20/20 ................................................................. 4-15 Figure 4-14. Suction Equalizing Line and Valve ......................................................................................... 4-16

Figure 5-1. Discharge Bleed Valve, Suction Equalizing Line and Valve ......................................................... 5-5 Figure 5-2. Oil Analysis Kit (VPN 3097A) ..................................................................................................... 5-8 Figure 5-3. Oil Sampler Valve (VPN #3708A) For Gas Compression Applications ......................................... 5-8 Figure 5-4. Oil Sampling Valve (VPN #3709A) For Ammonia and Refrigerant Compressors ......................... 5-9 Figure 5-5. Operating the Oil Sampling Valve ............................................................................................. 5-9 Figure 5-6. Stages of the Oil Sample Taking Process ................................................................................. 5-10 Figure 5-7. Compressor Replacement and Hardware Assembly (VSS 2401-3001 Shown).......................... 5-11 Figure 5-8. Bearing Axial Clearance Inspection ......................................................................................... 5-13 Figure 5-9. Bearing Radial Clearance Inspection ....................................................................................... 5-14 Figure 5-10. Gaterotor Bearing Clearance................................................................................................. 5-15 Figure 5-11. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance .............................................................................................. 5-16 Figure 5-12. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance Measurement Steps............................................................... 5-16 Figure 5-13. Visual Inspection Between Gaterotor and Bushing................................................................ 5-17 Figure 5-14. Gaterotor Float Dial Location ................................................................................................ 5-17 Figure 5-15. Gaterotor Float..................................................................................................................... 5-18 Figure 5-16. Alignment of Gaterotor ........................................................................................................ 5-18 Figure 5-17. Location of Dial Indicator Magnetic Base............................................................................... 5-18 Figure 5-18. Placement of Dial Indicator................................................................................................... 5-19 Figure 5-19. Measuring Backlash.............................................................................................................. 5-19 Figure 5-20. Chipped Edge of Gaterotor ................................................................................................... 5-20 Figure 5-21. Gaterotor Assembly Removal and Tools ................................................................................ 5-21 Figure 5-22. Gaterotor Assembly Removal ............................................................................................... 5-22 Figure 5-23. Gaterotor Assembly and Tools .............................................................................................. 5-23 Figure 5-24. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance .............................................................................................. 5-23 Figure 5-25. Gaterotor Assembly Breakdown ........................................................................................... 5-24 Figure 5-26. Gaterotor Thrust Bearing...................................................................................................... 5-25 Figure 5-27. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance .............................................................................................. 5-25 Figure 5-28. Gaterotor Assembly Removal ............................................................................................... 5-26 Figure 5-29. Gaterotor Assembly (VSM 97-127 Compressors ONLY) ......................................................... 5-27 Figure 5-30. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance .............................................................................................. 5-28 Figure 5-31. Gaterotor Blade Assembly .................................................................................................... 5-28 Figure 5-32. Gaterotor Blade Installation.................................................................................................. 5-29 Figure 5-33. Gaterotor Thrust Bearing...................................................................................................... 5-29 Figure 5-34. Thrust Bearing Installation.................................................................................................... 5-29 Figure 5-35. Roller Bearing Assembly ....................................................................................................... 5-30 Figure 5-36. Gaterotor Support (VSM 97-127).......................................................................................... 5-31 Figure 5-37. Gaterotor Blade Installation.................................................................................................. 5-31 Figure 5-38. Gaterotor Thrust Bearing (VSM 97-127)................................................................................ 5-32 Figure 5-39. Shaft Seal Assembly.............................................................................................................. 5-33 Figure 5-40. Handling Seal Face with Care ................................................................................................ 5-33 Figure 5-41. Compressor Shaft Seal Assembly .......................................................................................... 5-34 Figure 5-42. Compressor Shaft Seal Installation: Tapered and Straight Shafts ........................................... 5-35 Figure 5-43. Shaft Seal Breakdown (28985Y & 28985YA)................................................................. 5-36, 5-38 Figure 5-44. Shaft Seal Breakdown (28985W and 28985WA) .......................................................... 5-37, 5-40 Figure 5-45. Shaft with Pin ....................................................................................................................... 5-38 Figure 5-46. Shaft Seal Housing................................................................................................................ 5-38 Figure 5-47. The Alignment of Compressor Shaft and Mating Ring ........................................................... 5-38 Figure 5-48. Actuator Installation Using Anti-Rotation Bolts..................................................................... 5-42 Figure 5-49. Command Shaft Assembly Replacement .............................................................................. 5-43 Figure 5-50. Danfoss ICF 20-40 Valve Station (Liquid Injection Control) .................................................... 5-44

TOC - 6

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 1 · General Information

How To Use This Manual
This manual contains instructions for refrigeration compressor units. It has been divided into eight sections and Appendices:
Section 1: General Information Section 2: Theory of Operation Section 3: Installation Section 4: Operation Section 5: Maintenance & Service Section 6: Troubleshooting Section 7: Warranty and Parts Section 8: Spare Parts List
Appendices Appendix A: Torque Specifications Appendix B: Vilter Oil Appendix C: Vibration Measurements - Single Screw Compressor Appendix D: Liquid Injection Valve Setup Instructions and Quick Start Guide ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve Appendix E: Liquid Injection Valve Station ICF 20-40 Installation Guide Appendix F: Hand-Held Slide Valve Calibration Tool

CAUTION - Caution statements are shown when there are potentially hazardous situations, if not avoided, will result in damage to equipment.
NOTE - Notes are shown when there are additional information pertaining to the instructions explained.
Additional Important Notes
· Additional installation, operation and maintenance instructions can be found in the Vission20/20 manual (35391SC) or Compact Logix PLC Software Manual (35391CM).
· Due to continuing changes and unit updates, always refer to the website Emerson.com/Vilter to make sure you have the latest manual.
· Any suggestions of manual improvements can be made to VilterTM Manufacturing at the contact information on page i.

It is highly recommended that the manual be reviewed prior to servicing system parts.
Figures and tables are included to illustrate key concepts.
Safety precautions are shown throughout the manual. They are defined as the following:
NOTICE - Notice statements are shown when there are important information that shall be followed. Not following such notices may result in void of warranty, serious fines, serious injury and/or death.
WARNING - Warning statements are shown when there are hazardous situations, if not avoided, will result in serious injury and/or death.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

1 ­ 1

Section 1 · General Information System Unit Identification
To keep definitions of units simple and consistent, VilterTM has defined the following three: · Bare Shaft Compressor · Compressor Unit · Package Unit
Bare Shaft Compressor
A bare shaft compressor is just the compressor with no coupling and motor nor foundation.
Compressor Unit
A compressor unit consists of the bare shaft compressor with the coupling, motor, oil separator, frame, micro-controller system and oil system. A compressor unit typically a single screw compressor unit, is not mounted on a structural steel base.
Package Unit
A package unit is a complete system mounted on a structural steel base with interconnecting piping.

1 ­ 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 1 · General Information

Bare Shaft Refrigeration and Heat Pump Compressor Model Designations

The compressor bare shaft model designation can be found on the nameplate.

Compressor Model
VSS- Vilter Single Screw Compressor
VSM-Vilter Single Mini Screw Compressor
VRS- Vilter Twin Screw Compressor
VSR- Vilter Single Gaterotor Compressor
VSH- Vilter Single Screw Heat Pump
VSSH- Vilter Single Screw Heat Pump (High Pressure)

Size
CFM- Nominal CFM displacement of the compressor at 3600
rpm

Drive Shaft Type
STD- Standard Drive shaft (tapered or straight)
STR- Straight Shaft for Heavy Duty
SDS- Severe Duty Straight Shaft

Seal Type
A- Ammonia Service
H-Halocarbon Service
TA- Tandem Seal for Ammonia Service
TH- Tandem Seal for Halocarbon Service
AH- Ammonia Service High Pressure
AHF- Ammonia Service High Pressure Aflas O-ring
HV- High Pressure Design w/ Viton o-rings

VSS ­ 1851 ­ CIH ­ STR ­ SD ­ A ­ VIB

Compressor Type
CIH- Standard Cast Iron Material w/Discharge Connection Horizontal
CID- Standard Cast Iron Material w/Discharge Connection Down
STH- Steel Compressor Material w/ Discharge Connection Horizontal
DIH- Ductile Iron (750 MAWP) w/ Discharge Connection Horizontal
DIHST- Ductile Iron (750MAWP) w/Steel Housing, Discharge Connection Horizontal
DID- Ductile Iron Material w/ Discharge Connection Down

Slide Design Type
SD- Standard Slide Assembly
LR- Low Ratio Slide
HR- Standard Slide (Balance Grooves for >325 PSID)
FR- Fixed Ratio Single Slide
RS- Reinforced Shaft Rack
FV- Fixed Volume
Alphabet*- 205mm LITE compressor
Note- *: 205mm LITE compressorUse alphabet of slide number used in compressor BOM. Example: 26376A then slide designation: A.

Special Designations MV- Manual Volume Slide MCV- Manual Capacity and
Volume Slide CC- Cool Compression
EX- Expander O- Large Economizer Port
AF- AFLAS O-rings PC - Slide Piston Cast Iron
EO- External Oil Feed VIB- Main Housing with
Vibration Mounting LT- 205mm LITE Compressor
B- Balanced Main Rotor PPS- Slide with Ryton Clamps
N- 900# Flange PPC- Carbon Slide Clamp

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

1 ­ 3

1 ­ 4 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 2 · Theory of Operation

Compressor
The VilterTM Single Screw Compressor is a positive displacement, capacity and volume controlled, oil flooded,
rotary compressor which uses a single main screw inter-
meshed by two opposing gate rotors. Gas compression occurs when the individual fingers of each gate rotor sweep through the grooves, or flutes, of the main screw as the screw rotates. Compression occurs from the time the screw flute is first closed off by the gate rotor finger, until the time when the screw flute has rotated to the point of lining up with the discharge port in the com-
pressor housing. A labyrinth type seal is used to prevent gas at discharge pressure from leaking past the end of the screw. Any discharge gas leakage past the labyrinth seal is vented back to suction via four longitudinal holes drilled through the body of the screw.
By venting the discharge end of the main screw back to suction, forces on each end of the screw are equal. This results in zero net axial forces on the main bearings. With twin opposing gate rotors, all radial forces are cancelled out also. Main shaft bearings have no net forces except the weight of the screw and the shaft assembly.
The compressors are comprised of three rotating as-
semblies: the main screw assembly and the two gate rotor assemblies. Each of these rotating assemblies use a common bearing configuration consisting of a single,
cylindrical rolling element bearing at one end, and a pair of angular contact ball bearings at the other end. The pair of angular contact ball bearings are used to axially fix one end of the rotating shafts, and to absorb the small amount of thrust loads on the shafts. The inner races of the ball bearings are securely clamped to the rotating shafts, while the outer races are securely held in the bearing housing, thus fixing the axial position of the shaft in relation to the bearing housings. The cylindrical roller bearings at the opposite end of the shafts allow for axial growth of the shafts while supporting the radial loads from the shafts.
The suction gas enters the compressor housing through the top inlet flange, at the driven end of the unit. The driven end of the compressor housing is flooded with gas at suction pressure. The gas enters the open end of the main screw flutes at the driven end, and becomes trapped in the screw flute as the screw rotates and the gate rotor tooth enters the end of the flute. At this point, the compression process begins. Directly after the screw flute is closed off by the gate rotor tooth, oil is injected
into the groove.
The oil enters the compressor through a connection at the top of the compressor. The purpose of the injected oil is to absorb the heat of compression, to seal the gate
rotor tooth in the groove, and to lubricate the moving
parts.

Additional internal oiling ports are provided at the main
and gate rotor bearings to cool and lubricate the bearings. The mechanical shaft seal housing also contains oiling ports to lubricate, cool and provide a sealing film of oil for the mechanical shafts seal. Excess oil flows through the check valves on the sealing baffle plate.
This oil is directed at the main rotor roller bearing, which cools and lubricates the front roller bearing.
As the main screw rotates, the gate rotor is also driven,
causing the gate rotor tooth to sweep the groove in the
main screw. This sweeping action reduces the volume of the groove ahead of the gate rotor tooth and causes
the trapped gas and oil to be compressed in the reduced
volume. As the main screw continues to rotate, the gate
rotor tooth continues to reduce the groove volume to a
minimum, thus compressing the trapped gas to a maxi-
mum pressure. A labyrinth seal arrangement prevents the compressed gas from leaking past the end of the screw. As the gate rotor tooth reaches the end of the
groove, the groove rotates to a position that lines up
with the discharge port in the compressor housing and the gas/oil mixture is discharged from the screw at high pressure. This completes the compression cycle for a single flute of the main screw.
Once the gas is swept from the main screw flute through the discharge port, it passes into the discharge manifold of the compressor. From the discharge manifold, the
gas/oil exits the compressor housing.
Capacity and Volume Control
The VilterTM compressors feature the exclusive ParallexTM Slide System, which consists of a pair of slides for each
gate rotor assembly. These two independently operated slides are referred to as the capacity slide and the volume ratio slide. On the suction end of the screw, the capacity slide moves to vary the timing of the beginning of the compression process. With the slide moved all the way out to the suction end of the screw (the 100% position), the compression process begins immediately after the gate rotor tooth enters the screw flute and closes off the end of the groove. In this situation, the maximum volume of gas is trapped in the screw flute at the start of the compression process. As the slide is pulled back away from the suction end of the screw, the start of the compression process is delayed as some of the suction gas is allowed to spill back out of the screw flute until the screw rotates far enough to pass the end of the capac-
ity slide and begin compressing. This causes a reduced volume of gas to be trapped in the screw flute when the compression process begins. In this way, the capacity of the compressor is reduced from 100% down to as low as 10% of the full rated capacity.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

2 ­ 1

Section 2 · Theory of Operation

The capacity slide provides the means for controlling specific process set points. By continuously adjusting the flow of gas through the compressor, either suction
or discharge pressure in a particular process can be controlled. When coupled with a microprocessor controller, the adjustable capacity slide allows for precise and continuous automatic control of any parameter in the pro-
cess to a chosen set point.
The second slide for each gate rotor is the volume ratio slide. The purpose of the volume ratio slide is to maximize the efficiency of the compressor by matching the gas pressure within the screw flute at the point of discharge to the downstream process requirements. The volume ratio slide operates at the discharge end of the screw, and acts to vary the position of the discharge port. When the slide is extended fully to the discharge end of the screw (the 100% position), the compression process within the screw flute continues until the screw rotates far enough for the flute to pass the end of the volume ratio slide. At this point, the screw flute lines up
with the discharge port and the compressed gas is expelled from the screw flute. As the volume ratio slide is pulled back away from the discharge end of the screw, the position of the discharge port is changed and the gas is allowed to escape the screw flute earlier in the com-
pression process, at a reduced pressure.
The overall volume ratio within the compressor is determined by the distance between the front of the capacity slide (the start of compression) and the back of the volume ratio slide (the completion of compression). Therefore, the volume ratio slide must respond to
changes in the downstream pressure measured in the oil separator and position itself for the required compression ratio based on the position of the capacity slide. By only compressing the gas within the screw as far as required to match the pressure in the downstream receiver, the compressor efficiency is maximized. Proper positioning of the volume ratio slide prevents either over compressing or under compressing of the gas within the screw flute. This allows the single screw compressor to efficiently handle a range of volume ratios from as low as 1.2 up to 7.0.

Refrigerant and Oil System
The refrigeration and oil systems work in unison, but each one will be explained separately. Reference Figure 2-1 for refrigerant and oil flow descriptions. This is a typical refrigeration system with thermosyphon oil cooling.
Refrigerant Flow
The refrigeration compression process begins as refrigerant vapor enters the suction inlet (12). The refrigerant vapor flows through a suction stop/check valve (11), then through a mesh strainer (10) to the compressor (9). The refrigerant is then pressurized through the compressor and discharged as high pressure refrigerant vapor into the oil separator (1). In the oil separator, the oil is then separated from the discharged refrigerant by impingement separation. The high pressure refrigerant flows out to the condenser for cooling while the oil is pumped or siphoned back to the compressor.
The suction stop/check valve (11) is necessary to prevent reverse rotation and potential damage or oil loss at shut down. The discharge check valve (2) is positioned to prevent the vapor or liquid refrigerant from flowing back to the separator when the compressor is shut down.
The separator should be allowed to equalize slowly to suction pressure through a small bypass line around the suction stop/check valve (11). This will allow the compressor to start without a pressure differential across it, reducing the starting power requirements.
Oil Life and Oil Flow
Oil in the refrigeration system serves three primary purposes. They are compressor lubrication, sealing clearances between moving parts, and heat removal resulting from heat of compression and friction.
Initially, oil flow is driven by a mechanical gear pump (3). The oil internally lubricates all points inside the compressor. Once the system reaches design conditions, the oil pump can be shut off and oil flow is maintained by differential pressure. But on units with low pressure differentials such as booster and low pressure differential high stage compressors, the oil pump must remain on whenever the unit is running to maintain sufficient oil flow.
As the oil is separated from the refrigerant in the oil separator (1), it is pumped or siphoned through an oil cooler (5), then through an oil filter (4) and back to the injection port (6) of the compressor (9).
Furthermore, to collect oil from the coalescing side of the oil separator (1), an oil return line (8) is installed between the oil separator and the compressor (9). By opening the

2 ­ 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 2 · Theory of Operation
needle valve (7), this will allow oil dripping off the coalescing filters to be fed back to the compressor. This is a continuous cycle.

R717 VAPOR TO ATMOSPHERE
1

250#

PI

002

PT

002

BLEED

V100

DRAIN

LG 001 LG
002

TW

TW

TW

TW

750W

750W

750W

QE

QE

QE

TE

001

002

003

005

2 DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE DISCHARGE STOP VALVE

HIGH PRESSURE R717 VAPOR OUTLET

100 PSID

OIL SEPARATOR

MW

OPTIONAL

(STANDARD FOR BOOSTER &

SWING COMPRESSORS ONLY)

MOTOR AND

3

OIL PUMP

COALESCING OIL RETURN LINE FILTER
D101

12
LOW PRESSURE R717 VAPOR INLET

PT

PI

001 001

BLEED

SUCTION STOP VALVE

11
SUCTION CHECK VALVE

10
TE TW 004

FG 001
TE TW 001
OIL CHARGE
9

8

PT 003
PI BLEED
003

7

6

D100
MOTOR

D102 CAPACITY

C100
COMPRESSOR

D103 VOLUME

P100
4

TE TW 002

5

DRAIN
T

PT 004

PI

BLEED

004

R717 LIQUID/VAPOR OUTLET
E100
R717 LIQUID INLET

Figure 2-1. Refrigeration Compressor Unit P&ID (Thermosyphon Oil Cooling with Single Oil Filter Shown)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

2 ­ 3

Section 2 · Theory of Operation

Control System
The compressor unit is controlled by the micro-processor, i.e. Vission 20/20 panel or PLC panel. This panel's main function is to control the refrigeration system from the data that it receives from the sensors around the unit. For additional information, refer to micro-processor manual.
Temperature Elements, Pressure Transmitters and Indicators
Temperature elements (TE), pressure transmitters (PT) and pressure indicators (PI) are instruments used to measure temperatures and pressures at specific locations on the compressor unit. Temperature elements are typically mounted on the compressor, suction pipe, discharge pipe, oil separator, oil filter inlet and outlet pipe. Pressure transmitters are typically mounted on the block and bleed assembly. The pressure transmitters measure suction pressure, inlet and outlet oil pressure, and discharge pressure in the oil separator. Typically, pressure indicators are not mounted from the factory, except for a pressure indicator to show the nitrogen holding charge for shipping and storage purposes. If required, end users have the ability to mount pressure indicators at the block and bleed assembly.

Critical Application Guidelines
To ensure the successful operation of the Single Screw Compressor, the guidelines described below should be followed.
1. Proper lubrication is critical to the operation of the single screw compressor. The compressor relies on the injected oil to absorb and remove the heat of compression, to seal the compression chambers formed in the flutes of the screw, and to lubricate all moving parts. For this reason, it is imperative that the oil chosen be of correct viscosity, and that sufficient oil flow be provided at all times, using an auxiliary oil pump when necessary. The oil chosen must be compatible with the process gas as well, to prevent absorption of the gas into the oil, which would dilute the oil and reduce the viscosity. Also, oil filtration to 25 micron nominal particle size is required to ensure that only clean oil is injected into the compressor. For assistance in choosing the correct oil for the application and in sizing an auxiliary oil pump, consult a VilterTM representative.
2. Injection oil temperature must be closely controlled for optimum performance. Oil temperature must be maintained a minimum of 15 - 20°F above the gas mixture dew point at anytime to prevent condensation or liquid knockout from occurring within the compressor.
Note for CO2 and Heat Pump Applications
Because the oil system on the Single Screw Compressors utilizes discharge gas pressure as the means to move the injection oil through the system, it must be remembered that all components of the oil system are exposed to full discharge pressure
and must be pressure rated accordingly.

2 ­ 4

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 2 · Theory of Operation

Alarm and Shutdown Readings
WARNING
Software programming credentials shall only be made available by the supplier. The user will only have access to operational features established by the supplier. Failure to comply may result in serious injury
or death.
The control system for the Single Screw compressor must protect the machine from damage caused by running outside of normal operating conditions by providing operators with alarms when operating parameters have reached an abnormal condition, and by automatically stopping the compressor before these conditions can cause a unit failure. Pressures and temperatures of the process gas and the oil, as well as motor amperage and VFD frequency must all be continuously monitored to ensure the compressor is operating properly.
Refer to Figure 2-2 for locations of RTD and PT:
1. Low Gas Suction Temperature - This point protects the compressor from suction gas entering the compressor at too low of a temperature, and is activated by a direct reading from the suction temperature RTD located at the suction tee.
2. High Gas Discharge Temperature - This point protects the compressor against high gas temperature at the discharge of the unit, and is activated by a direct reading from the RTD located at the compressor discharge manifold.
3. Low Oil Separator Start Temperature - This point protects the compressor from starting with low oil temperature in the separator, and is activated by a direct reading from the RTD located at the bottom of the oil separator.
4. Low Oil Separator Run Temperature - Similar to the Low Oil Separator Start Temperature described above, however this point only becomes active after a predetermined period of running time, and uses a higher setpoint.
5. Low Oil Injection Temperature - This point protects the compressor from running with cold oil being injected into the screw housing, and is activated by a direct reading from the RTD located at the oil injection line. This point is bypassed for a predetermined period of time after starting to allow the unit time to start and warm up.
6. High Oil Injection Temperature - This point protects the compressor from running with hot oil being injected into the screw housing, and is activated by a direct reading from the RTD located at the oil injection line.

7. Low Suction Pressure - This point protects the compressor from drawing low suction pressure and is activated by a direct reading from the suction pressure transducer, which reads the pressure from a tap located at the suction stop/check valve housing.
8. High Discharge Pressure - This point protects the compressor from developing high discharge pressure and is activated by a direct reading from the discharge pressure transducer, which reads the pressure from a
tap located at the oil separator. In addition to this alarm and shutdown, the compressor package is ultimately protected from damage due to over pressurization by at least one discharge pressure relief valve located on the oil separator. The purpose of this safety setpoint is to allow for a lower setpoint to conform to a process requirement, and to prevent the relief valve from opening.
9. Prelube Oil Pressure - This point acts as a permissive
to start the compressor, and protects against the compressor starting with no oil lubrication. If, during a start sequence, the prelube oil pressure fails to rise above 4.0 PSID, the compressor will fail to start. The prelube
oil pressure is a calculated value obtained by subtracting the discharge pressure reading from the oil manifold pressure (oil filter outlet pressure) reading.
10. Low Oil Pressure - This point protects the compressor from running with insufficient lubrication pressure, and becomes active after a predetermined period of
running, usually sixty seconds. The oil pressure is a cal-
culated value obtained by subtracting the suction pressure from the oil manifold pressure (oil filter outlet pres-
sure) reading, which results in the actual pressure under
which the oil is entering the screw housing.
11. High Running Oil Filter Differential Pressure - This point alerts operators to clogging oil filters. When the oil filters develop a high differential pressure while running
at normal operating temperatures, it is an indication
that they are becoming dirty and must be changed. An alarm initially warns of dirty filters; if the situation worsens before the filters are changed a shutdown will stop
the compressor.
In most cases, the safety setpoints described above will have settings which are dictated by process requirements, and not necessarily mechanical constraints of the compressor. Process pressures and temperatures may vary considerably depending on the application of
the compressor, and the Single Screw compressor is designed to work well in a broad range of applications. For
this reason, it is impractical to suggest "initial" setpoints to fit all applications. Instead, minimum and maximum values for each safety setpoint are provided, while precise settings for the safety setpoints must be derived for
each installation.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

2 ­ 5

Section 2 · Theory of Operation

Single Screw Package Requirements
Process Gas Circuit
1. Suction Gas Stop/Check Valve - The Single Screw compressor requires a manually operated stop valve on the suction line to the compressor to allow for isolating the compressor package from process gas. Also, a check valve is required in the suction line to limit reverse rotation of the compressor on shutdown.
2. Suction Line Strainer - VilterTM strongly recommends the use of an in-line suction gas strainer to protect the Single Screw compressor from foreign material which may enter the compressor with the suction gas. This strainer is generally of stainless steel mesh construction.
3. Process Gas/Oil Separator - A separator vessel capable of removing the oil from the discharge gas stream with an efficiency down to at least 5 PPM oil carryover is required. Vilter's own available horizontal or vertical separator is an ASME-coded vessel which uses five stages of separation to achieve an oil loss of as little as 3 to 4 PPM.
4. Discharge Gas Relief Valve - To protect the compressor package from damage due to over pressurization, a relief valve must be installed inside of any discharge line hand block valves. The relief valve must be set to open at a pressure lower than the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) of the separator.

5. Oil Prelube Pump - Usually a direct driven gear type pump, the oil pump is required to prelube the compres-
sor prior to starting and to maintain oil pressure during any periods of low compression ratio operation.
6. Oil Cooler/ Temperature Control Valve - An oil cooler,
either air or water cooled, must be used to remove the heat of compression from the oil stream. A temperature control valve is used to maintain constant oil injection
temperature to the compressor.
7. Oil Filtration - Large capacity micronic oil filters are required to filter the oil before injection into the Single Screw compressor. Filtration down to 25 microns nominal or less is generally acceptable. Dual filters are recommended to allow replacement of one cartridge while the
compressor continues running with the other cartridge in service. If needed, separate oil filtration can be avail-
able for bearings and shaft seal.
8. Oil Heater - An oil heater is generally required and must be sized to maintain oil temperature of at least 90°F when the compressor is not running. For outdoor
installations, low ambient temperatures and winds must
be considered when sizing the oil heater. Also, insulating the separator and oil piping may be required in low tem-
perature ambient conditions.

Figure 2-2. Basic Single Screw Compressor System

2 ­ 6

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 3 · Installation

NOTICE
Vilter compressors are to be installed and connected to the customer-provided piping. Vilter expects this piping to be designed and built following ASME B31.3 Process Piping Guide, plus any other local applicable codes, and that the installation will be performed by
qualified personnel only.
Delivery Inspection
Every equipment supplied by Vilter is thoroughly inspected at the factory. However, damage can occur in shipment. For this reason, the compressor should be thoroughly inspected upon arrival, prior to off-loading. Any damage noted should be photographed and reported immediately to the transportation company. This way, an authorized agent can examine the compressor, determine the extent of damage and take necessary steps to rectify the claim with no serious or costly delays. At the same time, the local Vilter representative or the home office should be notified of any claims

made within ten (10) days after its discovery. Refer to Compressor Inspections Prior to Installation for additional recommendations.
Rigging and Lifting of the Compressor
WARNING
When rigging and lifting a compressor unit, use proper lifting device capable of lifting and maneuvering the weight and size of the compressor unit. Use only qualified personnel and additional personnel and lifting equipment (i.e. spreader bar) as required. Failure to comply may result in death, serious injury
and/or damage to equipment.
Only qualified personnel shall operate rigging and lifting equipment. Ensure that the lifting device is capable of lifting the weight of the compressor, refer to the supplied Vilter General Assembly (GA) drawing, and to Table 3-1 for weights of bare shaft compressors.

Bareshaft Compressor Lifting Points and Weights
Table 3-1. Bareshaft Compressor Component Weights
Component Weights

Models

Gaterotor

Gaterotor Bearing

Bearing Housing Housing Cover

Discharge Manifold

Main Compressor Assembly ONLY

97-127 291-601 751-901 1051-1301 1501-2101 2401-3001

3.3 lbs (1.6 kg) 19 lbs (9 kg) 28 lbs (13 kg) 37 lbs (17 kg) 54 lbs (24 kg) 58 lbs (27 kg)

8 lbs (4 kg) 11 lbs (5 kg) 11 lbs (5 kg) 13 lbs (6 kg) 19 lbs (9 kg) 32 lbs (15 kg)

N/A 125 lbs (57 kg) 177 lbs (80 kg) 274 lbs (125 kg) 349 lbs (158 kg) 788 lbs (358 kg)

249 lbs (113 kg) 1105 lbs (502 kg) 1450 lbs (658 kg) 2006 lbs (910 kg) 3151 lbs (1429 kg) 4152 lbs (1883 kg)

Gaterotor Cover
10 lbs (5 kg) 46 lbs (21 kg) 33 lbs (15 kg) 42 lbs (19 kg) 70 lbs (32 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Models
97-127 291-601 751-901 1051-1301 1501-2101 2401-3001

Table 3-2. Bareshaft Compressor Component Lifting Hole Sizes

Component Lifting Hole Sizes

A

B

C

D

Discharge Manifold (Side)

Discharge Manifold (Top)

Main Compressor Assembly ONLY
(Discharge)

Main Compressor Assembly ONLY
(Suction)

A & B Lifting Points: 1/2 - 13 UNC -2B

-

-

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC-2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

3/4-10 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

5/8-11 UNC -2B

3/4-10 UNC -2B

E
Gaterotor Cover
3/8-16 UNC-2B
3/8-16 UNC -2B 3/8-16 UNC -2B 5/8-11 UNC -2B

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

3 ­ 1

Section 3 · Installation

To lift the compressor, use lifting points on compressor frame to attach the lifting device, see Table 3-2 and Figure 3-1 to 3-6. There are a few points to consider prior to moving it:
· Ensure that the weight is evenly distributed amongst the lifting device (i.e. lifting chains and spreader bar) prior to lifting.

· Ensure that the lifting device is not obstructed by any parts of the compressor to prevent damage to components.
· Use additional personnel as needed to spot and aid in maneuvering the compressor.
· Ensure there is plenty of space to maneuver the compressor, and a clear path to its location.

E C B

D Main Compressor Assembly
E

A

Gaterotor

Cover

Model 1551-2101 Shown

Discharge Manifold

MAIN HOUSING LIFTING POINT 1/2-13 UNC

Gaterotor Bearing Housing
Gaterotor Bearing Housing Cover

Figure 3-1. Bareshaft Compressor Lifting Points and Component Weights

Lifting Eye

Main Lift Point Lifting Eye

Lifting Point B 1/2-13 UNC
GATEROTOR COVER

Center of Gravity

Lifting Point A 1/2-13 UNC

ROLLER BEARING HOUSING
GATEROTOR BALL BEARING SUPPORT

Figure 3-2. Bareshaft Compressor Assembly Center of Gravity (Models 97-127)

3 ­ 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 3 · Installation Bareshaft Compressor Center of Gravity (Models 291-2101)
Main Lift Point Lifting Eyes
Center of Gravity

Center of Gravity Range

Model 1551-2101 Shown

Figure 3-3. Bareshaft Compressor Assembly Center of Gravity (Models 291-2101)
Center of gravity may differ slightly between models 291-2101. Adjust main lift point within the range to keep bareshaft compressor as leveled as possible when lifting.
Main Lift Point
Lifting Eyes

Discharge Manifold

Center of Gravity Range

Main Compressor Assembly

Figure 3-4. Bareshaft Compressor Center of Gravity - Discharge Manifold and Main Compressor Assembly (Models 291-2101)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

3 ­ 3

Section 3 · Installation Bareshaft Compressor Center of Gravity (Models 2401-3001)
Main Lift Point Lifting Eyes
Center of Gravity

Figure 3-5. Bareshaft Compressor Assembly Center of Gravity (Models 2401-3001)
Main Lift Point
Lifting Eyes Center of Gravity

Discharge Manifold

Main Compressor Assembly

Figure 3-6. Bareshaft Compressor Center of Gravity - Discharge Manifold and Main Compressor Assembly (Models 2401-3001)

3 ­ 4

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 3 · Installation

Compressor Inspections Prior to Installation
The compressor must be inspected prior to installation since components could have come loose and/or damaged during shipment or moving.
· Check for loose bolts, particularly the compressor mounting nuts.
· Look into the suction and discharge connections and inspect for any signs of corrosion on parts.
· Check for bent or damaged components. The compressor should have also been inspected prior to offloading, see Delivery Inspection.
· Check that the nitrogen pressure is still holding pressure. Any leaks must be fixed and the system purged and re-charged with dry nitrogen.
· Prelube the compressor with the main oil pump and rotate by hand several revolutions prior to start.
· Notify VilterTM Service and Warranty Department when the compressor is started.
NOTE For Pre Start-Up and Start-Up checklists, please contact Vilter Service and Warranty Department.
CAUTION
Before installation, follow the proper procedures to depressurize the compressor.

Compressor Mounting
The Vilter single screw compressor should be firmly mounted to the package. Isolation dampers should not be used between the compressor and the package. See Compressor Replacement in Section 5 for more installation details.
Notice on Using Non-Vilter Oils
CAUTION
Do not mix oils. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTICE
Vilter does not approve non-Vilter oils for use with Vilter compressors. Use of oils not specified or supplied by Vilter will void the compressor warranty.
Due to the need for adequate lubrication, Vilter recommends only the use of Vilter lubricants, designed specifically for Vilter compressors. With extensive research that has been performed, we are able to offer per each specific application lubricating oils. Use of oil not specified or supplied by Vilter will void the compressor warranty. Please contact your local Vilter representative or the Home Office for further information.

Recommended On-site Tools
The tools recommended to have on site are important for troubleshooting, inspections and compressor unit operation. Besides general mechanic tools, these tools are recommended:
· Oil Pump (maximum of 2-3 GPM with motor approved for Division 1 or Division 2 and with ability to overcome suction pressure) (VPN A40849A)
· Infrared Heat Gun
· Torque Wrenches (with ranges from 0 to 600 ft-lbs)
· Sockets and wrenches up to 2-1/2" (63.5 mm)
· Voltmeter

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

3 ­ 5

Section 3 · Installation

Long Term Storage Recommendations
The procedure described is a general recommendation for long term storage (over one month of no operation) of Vilter compressors. It is the responsibility of the installation firm and end user to address any unusual conditions. Use the supplied long term storage log sheet to help with record keeping, see section page 3-7.
Warranty of the system remains in effect as described at the beginning of this manual.
The following are recommendations regarding long term storage:
· If the compressor is designed for indoor duty, it must be stored in a heated building, preferably air conditioned to control moisture, to prevent corrosion of the main rotor shaft and for the compressor.
· If the unit is designed for outdoor duty and is to be stored outdoors, a canvas tarp is recommended for protection until installation. Adequate drainage should be provided. Place wood blocks under the base skid so that water does not collect inside the base perimeter or low spots in the tarp.
· All compressor stop valves are to be closed to isolate the compressor from the remainder of the system. All other valves, except those venting to atmosphere, are to be open.
· The volume and capacity slide valve motor enclosures should have corrosion inhibitors installed in them and the enclosures should be sealed. On a six month basis (depending on relative humidity), check and replace inhibitors as necessary, and check for signs of corrosion.
· Cover all bare metal surfaces (main rotor shaft, coupling, flange faces, etc.) with rust inhibitor.
· Desiccant is to be placed in the control panel. If the panel is equipped with a space heater, it is to be energized. Use an approved electrical spray-on corrosion inhibitor for panel components (relays, switches, etc.)
· All pneumatic controllers and valves (Fisher, Taylor, etc.) are to be covered with plastic bags and sealed with desiccant bags inside.
· Before leaving VilterTM Manufacturing the compressor is evacuated and pressurized, with dry nitrogen, to 5 psig. Pressure must be monitored with the gauge (provided by VilterTM) and checked on a regular basis (at least monthly).
· It is essential that the nitrogen or clean dry gas holding charge be maintained. If not already installed, it is required that a gauge is to be added to help monitor the nitrogen holding charge pressure. If a drop in

pressure occurs, the source of leakage must be found and corrected. The system must be evacuated and recharged with dry nitrogen to maintain the package integrity.
· Manually rotate the compressor shaft 6 ½ revolutions every month to prevent flat spots on the bearing surfaces. If the compressor unit is installed, wired, and charged with oil, open all oil line valves and run the oil pump for 10 seconds prior to rotating the compressor shaft. Continue running the oil pump while the compressor shaft is being turned to help lubricate the surfaces of the shaft seal. For cool compression, there is no pre-lube pump, so the driveshaft must be turned by hand.
· Maintenance log to be kept with documenting dates to show all the procedures have been completed (see next page).

3 ­ 6

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Long Term Storage Log
Company: Serial Number:

Sales Order Number:

Name (Please Print): Date (M/D/Y):

Initial:

PSI Nitrogen Pressure - Current

PSI Nitrogen Pressure - Recharged (If pressure is low, identify and fix leak prior to recharging, see Compressor Unit Leak Check procedure in Section 5)
Nitrogen Leak Location (Briefly explain nature of leak):

Compressor Shaft (Rotate shafts at least 6 revolutions) Motor Shaft (Rotate shafts at least 6 revolutions) Motor Bearings Greased Air Cooled Oil Cooler Rotated (If equipped) Bare Metal Surfaces (Check all bare metal surfaces for rust and ensure they are covered with rust inhibitor) Desiccants (Are desiccants still effective? If not, replace. Check control panel, motor, pneumatic controllers and valves) Cover Bags/Tarp (Ensure bags and tarps are not torn and are sealed over components correctly, replace if damaged) Valves (Stop valves are in closed position so the compressor unit is isolated. All other valves, except those venting and draining to atmosphere are to be open)
Space Heater & Panel Components (Ensure space heater is energized and panel components are rust-free)

Name (Please Print): Date (M/D/Y):

Initial:

PSI Nitrogen Pressure - Current

PSI Nitrogen Pressure - Recharged (If pressure is low, identify and fix leak prior to recharging, see Compressor Unit Leak Check procedure in Section 5)
Nitrogen Leak Location (Briefly explain nature of leak):

Compressor Shaft (Rotate shafts at least 6 revolutions) Motor Shaft (Rotate shafts at least 6 revolutions) Motor Bearings Greased Air Cooled Oil Cooler Rotated (If equipped) Bare Metal Surfaces (Check all bare metal surfaces for rust and ensure they are covered with rust inhibitor) Desiccants (Are desiccants still effective? If not, replace. Check control panel, motor, pneumatic controllers and valves) Cover Bags/Tarp (Ensure bags and tarps are not torn and are sealed over components correctly, replace if damaged) Valves (Stop valves are in closed position so the compressor unit is isolated. All other valves, except those venting and draining to atmosphere are to be open) Space Heater & Panel Components (Ensure space heater is energized and panel components are rust-free)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

3 ­ 7

Section 3 · Installation Stop/Check Valve Installation1
The new design will apply only to the 2" thru 4" stop valves. Retrofitting a field installation will require replacing the bonnet assembly. The bonnet must be installed with the spring towards the bottom, see Figure 3-7. The drill fixture is designed so that the hole for the spring will always be drilled on the opposite side from the cast-in Vilter name on the bonnet. From the outside of the valve, the casting numbers must always be towards the top of the valve. For Stop/Check Valve Operation, refer to Section 4.
Correct
Wrong

Correct Wrong

Verify the location of the Spring and note the VilterTM name.

Figure 3-7. Stop/Check Valve Orientation

1

For VSM-97, VSM-113 and VSM-127 this is just a

Stop Valve

3 ­ 8

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 3 · Installation

Piping
Refer to the ANSI/ASME B31.5 Code for Refrigeration Piping. The necessary connections to be made to the screw compressor will vary depending on the type of oil cooling method used. Main line refrigerant suction and discharge connections are always necessary.
· Before installing piping, the compressor inlet and outlet ports should be inspected to ensure no dirt is present.
· Piping should be supported so that no piping loads are transmitted to the compressor casings.
· All piping should be inspected for cleanliness before installation. As each pipe is connected to the compressor, the coupling alignment should be checked to ensure that no alteration has taken place.
· If alignment has altered, the compressor is being strained and the piping supports must be adjusted.
· It is not sufficient merely to re-align the drive coupling, as this will not correct the cause of the strain.
· Care must be taken to avoid trapping the lines except for specific purposes. When traps are used, the horizontal dimensions should be as short as possible to avoid excessive oil trapping.
· Lines for ammonia systems must be of steel pipe with specially designed ammonia service fittings. Common pipe fittings must NEVER be used as they will not provide the same service. Steel pipe is generally used in large installations when joints are welded.
In making up joints for steel pipe, the following procedures should be followed:
· For threaded connections, all threads on the pipe and fitting should be carefully cleaned to remove all traces of grease or oil. Threads should then be wiped dry with a lintless cloth. Only thread filling compounds suitable for service should be used for making steel pipe joints. These compounds should be used sparingly, and on the pipe only. Do not put any on the first two threads to prevent any of the thread sealing compound from entering the piping system. Acetylene or arc welding is frequently used in making steel pipe joints, however, only a skilled welder should attempt this kind of work. Take care to see no foreign materials are left in the pipes and remove all burrs formed when cutting pipe.
· It is important to avoid short, rigid pipe lines that do not allow any degree of flexibility. This must be done to prevent vibration being transmitted through the pipe lines to the buildings. One method of providing the needed flexibility to absorb the vibration is to provide long lines that are broken by 90° Ells in three directions.

· A second method would be to install flexible pipe couplings as close to the compressor unit as possible with connections run in two different directions, 90° apart. These flexible connections should be installed on both the high and low side lines of the compressor unit.
· Hangers and supports for coils and pipe lines should receive careful attention. During prolonged operation of the coils, they may become coated with ice and frost, adding extra weight to the coil The hangers must have ample strength and be securely anchored to withstand the vibration from the compressor and adequately support the pipe lines.
· For CO2 piping, the pipes can have smaller diameters and they will require a greater thickness to withstand the higher pressures.
· Smaller Halocarbon and Hydroflourocarbon installations use copper pipes with solder type fittings where possible. The use of screw type fittings in Halocarbon systems should be held to an absolute minimum, as these refrigerants, due to their physical properties, will leak through screw type joints.
· When drawn copper tubing is used for Halocarbon lines, type "K" or "L" conforming to ASTM B88 should be used. Soft annealed copper tubing conforming to ASTM B280 can also be used for tube sizes not larger than 1-3/8" in outside diameter. These requirements are in accordance with the mechanical code for refrigeration ANSI B9.1-1971. The type of copper tubing to be used for a given pressure is dependent on the strength of the copper at the design temperature. Some local codes forbid the use of Type "L". Therefore, before installation, be sure to check local requirements. Never use type "M" as it does not have adequate wall thickness to withstand the operating pressures.
· For halocarbon piping, only wrought copper fittings should be used. Cast fittings as used for water service are porous and will allow the refrigerant to escape. Note this exception: In larger pipe sizes, wrought fittings are not available. However, specially tested cast fittings are available and these may be used with complete safety.
· When soldering copper tubing joints, only silver solder should be used for Refrigerant-22 service. Soft solder such as "50-50" should never be used, as its melting point is too low, lacks mechanical strength, and tends to break down chemically in the presence of moisture.
· Water supply and drain connections, and equipment using water, should be installed so all the water may be drained from the system after the plant has been shut down in cold weather. These precautions

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

3 ­ 9

Section 3 · Installation

will avoid costly damage to the equipment due to freezing.
This information is taken from ASHRAE 15-89 and ANSI/ ASME B31.5. The installing contractor should be thoroughly familiar with these codes, as well as any local codes.
CAUTION
Accumulated liquid in the suction header can damage the compressor if not drained. Always drain headers (suction and discharge headers) prior to start-ups. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.

Flange Loads
The ideal load applied to flanges of the compressor unit is zero. However, it's not practical to expect that no loads will be applied to unit connections. Thermal, dead, live, wind & seismic loads must be considered and even tolerated. Well supported external piping connected to the compressor will still result in some loads applying forces and moments in three axes to unit flanges.
The most important issue is the motor-compressor misalignment caused by external forces (F in lbf) and moments (M in ft-lbf) imposed by plant piping. In Figure 3-8 and Table 3-3, are the maximum allowable forces and moments that can be applied to compressor flanges when the compressor is mounted on an oil separator.
It must be noted that it is necessary to check for compressor shaft movement when the job is complete. In no case shall the attached piping be allowed to cause more than 0.002" movement at the compressor shaft. If more than 0.002" movement is detected the piping

Nozzle Dia. (in.) 4 6 8 10 12 14

5-6 PIPE DIAMETERS

CUSTOMER SUPPORTS WHEN CHECK VALVE
IS MOUNTED HERE

CHECK VALVE

Table 3-3. Maximum Allowable Flange Loads

Fz (lbf)

Fy (lbf) Fx (ft-lbf) Mzz (ft-lbf) Myy (ft-lbf) Mxx (ft-lbf)

400

400

400

300

300

300

600

600

600

500

500

500

900

900

900

1000

1000

1000

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

1500

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

2000

DISCHARGE LINE
HANGER

3-4 PIPE DIAMETERS

CUSTOMER SUPPORTS WHEN CHECK VALVE IS MOUNTED HERE
5 PIPE DIAMETERS

5 PIPE DIAMETERS
5 PIPE DIAMETERS

HANGER
DISCHARGE LINE
3-4 PIPE DIAMETERS

SUCTION LINE
CHECK VALVE
Y

CHECK VALVE
CUSTOMER SUPPORT Y

SUCTION LINE

Z

X

Z

X

X Y

Z
CUSTOMER SUPPORT

X Y

Z
CUSTOMER SUPPORT

3 ­ 10

Figure 3-8. Maximum Allowable Flange Loads
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 3 · Installation

must be adjusted to reduce the compressor shaft movement to less than 0.002". For example, the compressor shaft should not move more than 0.002" when piping is removed or connected to the compressor.
IMPORTANT ­ piping elements shall be supported per the requirements of ASME B31.5 / B31.3 or other local codes as applicable. See guidelines below, particularly with concern to minimize loads on check valves.
CAUTION
Accumulated liquid in the suction header can damage the compressor if not drained. Always drain headers (suction and discharge headers) prior to start-ups. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Slide Valve Actuator Installations Instructions
CAUTION
When installing the optical slide motor, loosen locking collar before sliding the collar down on the shaft. Do not use a screwdriver to pry locking collar into position.
Installation
See Slide Valve Actuator Assembly Replacement in Section 5 for installation details.
Overview
Calibration of an optical slide valve actuator is a two step process that must be done for each actuator installed of the compressor. Briefly, the steps are as follows.
1) The actuator motor control module, located inside the actuator housing, is calibrated so that it knows the minimum and maximum rotational positions of the slide valve it controls. The calibrated actuator will output 0 VDC at the minimum position and 5 VDC at the maximum position.
2) After the actuator motor control module has been calibrated for 0-5Volts, the controlling channel corresponding to the actuator motor (either the capacity or volume) has to be calibrated. This instructs the control panel to learn the rotational 0% position & rotational 100% position of the slide valve travel.
NOTE Because there is an optical sensor on this motor, do
not attempt calibration in direct sunlight.

Actuator Motor Control Module Calibration Procedure
1. Disable the Slide Non-Movement Alarm by going to the "Setup" menu on the control panel and choosing "Alarm Disable" for the Slide Non-Movement Option. (If applicable).
2. Completely shut off the power to the control panel completely.
3. If not already done, mount the slide valve actuator per ("Vilter Actuator set up for Capacity and Volume Slide Motors). Next, wire the actuator per the attached wiring diagrams, using the already installed electrical conduit to run the cables. The old wiring can be used to pull the new cables through the conduit to the control panel. The cables may also be externally tie-wrapped to the conduit. Run the yellow AC power cable(s) and the gray DC position transmitter cable(s) in different conduit. This prevents the DC position transmitter cable from picking up electrical noise from the AC power cable. Do not connect either of the cables to the actuators yet.
In addition, if the actuators are replacing old gearmotors on early units, you must remove the capacitors and associated wiring from inside the control panel. This is necessary to prevent electrical damage to the new actuator motor.
4. When completing the calibration of the new actuators, the motors are signaled to move to below 5%. This may not completely occur when exiting the calibration screen due to a "program timer". HOWEVER, when the compressor actually starts, the motors will travel below 5% and function correctly. The user may see that the actuators are not below 5% after calibration and try to find the reason. If the calibration screen is re-entered right away and then exited, the timer will allow the actuator to go below the 5% on the screen. This may be perceived as a problem; in reality,it is not.
NOTE The 0 to 5V-position transmitter output of the actuator will fluctuate wildly during the calibration process. To prevent damage to the actuators, do not connect the yellow power cable or the gray position transmitter cable until instructed to do so later on.
5. Refer to Calibrate Slide Valve Actuators (using Vission 20/20 or PLC) in Section 4 or Appendix F for more details.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

3 ­ 11

Section 3 · Installation

Instrumentation Requirements
Pressure
There are four pressure transducers required to read system pressures as listed below (see Figure 3-9):
1. Suction Pressure Transducer - (15.0 - 1000 PSIG) measures the gas suction pressure into the compressor housing, which provides the permissive to start at reaching minimum suction pressure, and is used to detect low suction pressure while running and in the capacity control logic.
2. Discharge Pressure Transducer - (15 ­ 1000 psig) measures the discharge pressure of the process gas in the separator, which provides detection of high discharge pressure, and may also be used for capacity control logic.
3. Oil Filter Inlet pressure transducer - (15 ­ 1000 psig) measures the oil pressure as it enters the oil filter canisters and is used to calculate oil filter differential pressure to provide detection of high filter differential pressure.
4. Oil Manifold pressure transducer - (15 ­ 1000 psig) measures the oil pressure downstream of the oil filter as the oil is injected into the compressor, and provides detection and protection against low prelube oil pressure, and low running oil injection pressure.

SUCTION GAS BLEED

1/4" OIL CHARGING
MOTOR

TE COMPRESSOR

Additional pressure transducers may be required and installed by the customer for pressure readings at customer specified points such as process gas discharge pressure from the package boundary, cooling water pressure to and/or from the oil cooler, etc.
Temperature
There are four pressure temperature readings required for processor control, as listed below (see Figure 3-9):
5. Suction temperature RTD - measures the temperature of the incoming suction gas, and is used to provide detection of low suction temperature when the unit is running.
6. Discharge temperature RTD - measures the temperature of the gas/oil mixture as it is discharged from the compressor housing, and provides detection of high running discharge temperature.
7. Oil Separator temperature RTD - measures the temperature of the oil in the separator sump, and produces the oil temperature start permissive and detection of low running separator temperature.
8. Oil Injection temperature RTD - measures the temperature of the oil as it is injected into the compressor, which provides detection of either high or low running oil injection temperature.

S
TE 6
1/4"

CHECK DISCHARGE VALVE STOP VALVE

FILTER DRAIN

BLEED

FILTER DRAIN
OPTIONAL DUAL OIL FILTERS

BLEED
TE 8 STANDARD SINGLE
OIL FILTER
BLEED

FILTER

DRAIN

OIL SEPARATOR

TE

DRAIN

7

MOTOR

M

PUMP

100#
FG 1

VENT
OIL COOLER

3 ­ 12

OIL DRAIN
STANDARD WATER COOLED OIL COOLER

DRAIN

OPTIONAL REMOTE AIR COOLED OIL COOLER
Figure 3-9. Additional Instruments

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 3 · Installation

* Additional RTD's may be required and installed by the customer for temperature readings at customer specified points such as discharge gas temperature from the package boundary, cooling water temperature to and/ or from the oil cooler, gas aftercooler temperature, etc.
Miscellaneous
One additional instrument required is a current transformer mounted around one phase of the drive motor leads to measure main motor amperage. The amperage signal provides detection of high motor amperage, and is used in the capacity control logic. Also, additional input points may be required for customer connection of remote signals such as Start and Stop commands, and capacity setpoint control.
If a VFD is used, then amps are fed from the VFD starter to the PLC, therefore a current transformer is not needed.

characteristics of the various refrigerants, two different testing methods are necessary.
Ammonia Systems
Dry nitrogen may be used to raise the pressure in an ammonia system to the proper level for the test. The gas may be put into the system through the charging valve or any other suitable opening. Adjust the pressure regulator on the bottle to prevent over-pressurization. Do not exceed the pressure rating on the vessel with the lowest pressure rating.
Carbon Dioxide should NOT be used as a testing gas in a system where ammonia is already dissolved in any moisture remaining. This will cause ammonium carbonate to precipitate when the CO2 is added. If heavy enough, this precipitate may cause the machine to freeze and clog the strainer.

Testing Refrigeration System For Leaks
CAUTION
Do not hydro test compressor unit. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
CAUTION
The compressor unit along with other system units contain many components with various pressure ratings. Pressure relief protection provided considers the design pressure of a system components. Before replacing a pressure relief valve with a relief valve having a higher pressure setting, all system
components must be evaluated for acceptability.
Vilter equipment is tested for leaks at the factory. One of the most important steps in putting a refrigeration system into operation is field testing for leaks. This must be done to assure a tight system that will operate without any appreciable loss of refrigerant. To test for leaks, the system pressure must be built up. Test pressures for various refrigerants are listed in ANSI B9.1-1971 code brochure entitle "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". These pressures will usually suffice, however, it is advisable to check local codes as they may differ. Before testing may proceed, several things must be done.
First, if test pressures exceed the settings of the system, relief valves or safety devices, they must be removed and the connection plugged during the test. Secondly, all valves should be opened except those leading to the atmosphere. Then, open all solenoids and pressure regulators by the manual lifting stems. All bypass arrangements must also be opened. Because of differences in

A mixture of four parts water to one part liquid soap, with a few drops of glycerin added, makes a good solution. Apply this mixture with a one inch round brush at all flanges, threaded joints, and welds. Repair all visible leaks. If possible, leave the pressure on over night. A small pressure drop of 5 lbs over this period indicates a very tight system.
Remember to note the ambient temperature, as a change in temperature will cause a change in pressure.
After the system is thoroughly tested, open all valves on the lowest part of the system so the gas will float away from the compressor. This prevents any dirt or foreign particles from entering the compressor and contaminating the working parts. The oil should then be charged into the compressor.
Charge a small amount of ammonia into the system and pressurize the system to its respective design pressure. Pass a lit sulfur stick around all joints and connections. Any leaks will be indicated by a heavy cloud of smoke. If any leaks are observed during this test, they must be repaired and rechecked before the system can be considered tight and ready for evacuation.
Halocarbon Refrigerant Systems
"Oil pumped" dry nitrogen, or anhydrous CO2 in this order of preference may be used to raise the pressure to the proper level for testing.
When the proper pressure is attained, test for leaks with the soap mixture previously described. After all leaks are found and marked, relieve the system pressure and repair the leaks. Never attempt to repair soldered or welded joints while the system is under pressure. Soldered joints should be opened and re soldered.
Do not simply add more solder to the leaking joint. After

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

3 ­ 13

Section 3 · Installation
all the joints have been repaired and the system is considered "tight" the system may be tested with refrigerant.
Attach a drum of the refrigerant to be used in the system and allow the gas to enter until a pressure of 5 psig is reached.
Remove the refrigerant drum and bring the pressure to the recommended test level with oil pumped dry nitrogen or CO2. Then check the entire system again for leaks, using a halide torch or electronic leak detector. Be sure to check all flanged, welded, screwed and soldered joints, all gasketed joints, and all parting lines on castings. If any leaks are found, they must be repaired and rechecked before the system can be considered tight again, remembering that no repair should be made to welded or soldered joins while the system is under pressure.
CO2 Systems
A CO2 system will tend to be more prone to leaks due to the higher working pressures and the smaller molecule size, and therefore its leak detection should become a regular maintenance procedure. For a charge size of above 661 lbs, for example, the recommendation would be to perform the leak detection procedure about 4 times a year.
An oil stain will be a visual indicator of a CO2 leak, but there are also leak detection sprays available in the market (such as Weicon´s or Bulleye´s), infrared hand held leak detectors (such as D-TEK CO2), and ultrasonic leak detectors of several brands2.

2

Information taken from Commercial CO2

Refrigeration Systems Guide for Subcritical and

Transcritical CO2 Applications, by Emerson.

3 ­ 14

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

Notice on Using Non-Vilter Oils
CAUTION
Do not mix oils. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
NOTICE
Vilter does not approve non-Vilter oils for use with Vilter compressors. Use of oils not specified or supplied by Vilter will void the compressor warranty.
Due to the need for adequate lubrication, Vilter recommends only the use of Vilter lubricants, designed specifically for Vilter compressors. Use of oil not specified or supplied by Vilter will void the compressor warranty.
Please contact your local Vilter representative or the Home Office for further information.
Operation
All operation (set-point adjustments, calibrations, monitoring) of the compressor unit is done through the micro-processor. For additional procedural information, refer to micro-processor manual (35391SC for Vission 20/20 Operating Manual or 35391CM for Compact Logix PLC Software Manual).
WARNING
Software programming credentials shall only be made available by the supplier. The user will only have access to operational features established by the supplier. Failure to comply may result in serious injury
or death.

Control System
Starting, Stopping and Restarting The Compressor
For additional control information, refer to micro-processor manual ( 35391SC for Vission20/20 Operating Manual or 35391CM for Compact Logix PLC Software Manual).
WARNING
Software programming credentials shall only be made available by the supplier. The user will only have access to operational features established by the supplier. Failure to comply may result in serious injury
or death.
Starting
Before the screw compressor unit can start, certain conditions must be met. All of the safety setpoints must be in a normal condition, and the suction pressure must be above the low suction pressure setpoint to ensure a load is present. When the "ON/OFF" switch or "ManualAuto" button is pressed, the oil pump will start. When sufficient oil pressure has built up and the compressor capacity control and volume ratio slide valves are at or below 10%, the compressor unit will start.
NOTE The amount of oil pressure that needs to be achieved before compressor start is at least 6 psig above the
discharge pressure. For additional information on Low Oil Pressure at Start, see Troubleshooting Guide -
General Problems and Solutions in Section 6.
If the compressor is in the automatic mode, it will now load and unload and vary the volume ratio in response to the system demands.

Stopping/Restarting
Stopping the compressor unit can be accomplished a number of ways. Any of the safety setpoints will stop
the compressor unit if an abnormal operating condition exists. The compressor unit "On-Off" or stop button will
turn the compressor unit off as will the low pressure setpoint. If any of these conditions turns the compressor
unit off, the slide valve motors will immediately energize to drive the slide valves back to 5% limit. The control
motors will be de-energized when the respective slide valve moves back below 5%. If there is a power failure, the compressor unit will stop. If the manual start on
power failure option is selected, restarting from this
condition is accomplished by pushing the reset button to ensure positive operator control. If the auto start on
power failure option is selected, the compressor unit will start up after a waiting period. With both options,

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 1

Section 4 · Operation

the compressor slide valves must return below their respective 5% limits before the compressor unit can be restarted.
NOTE Wait a minimum of 20 minutes (to allow the compressor unit to equalize to suction pressure) between pre-lubing or pushing the start button.
Emergency Shutdown
Emergency shutdown is initiated by the following:
1. A shutdown or trip condition of a process variable while the system is in operation. If a process variable reaches a high-high or low-low shutdown setpoint, the compressor unit will automatically stop. A shutdown alarm is also generated on the control panel HMI screen annunciating the specific process variable trip condition.
2. The Local Emergency Shutdown push button located on the side of the control panel enclosure. When the Local Emergency Shutdown push button is activated, the entire unit powers down. Also, the compressor capacity and volume slide valve will stay in their last position until the unit is powered up. Once recovery has been accomplished and the unit is to be re-powered, the Local Emergency Shutdown push button must be pulled out to power up the unit and controls.

Capacity and Volume Ratio Control through Slide Valve Actuators
Capacity and volume ratio control of the screw compressor is achieved by movement of the respective slide valves, actuated by electric motors.
When viewing the compressor from the discharge end (opposite the drive end), the upper motor is for capacity control. The command shaft turns (see Table 4-1) to decrease the capacity to 10% and reverses to increase the capacity to 100%. The lower motor is for volume ratio control. The command shaft turns to reduce the volume ratio to 2.0, and reverses to increase the volume ratio to 5.0.
Actuation of the electric motors can be done manually or automatically. To actuate the motors manually, place the desired mode selector in the manual position and push the manual Increase or Decrease buttons. In the automatic mode, the microprocessor determines the direction to actuate the electric motors. However, in the automatic mode, there is an "On" and "Off" time for the capacity control motor. The "On" time is the time in which the slide valve moves, and the "Off" time is the time in which the system is allowed to stabilize before another change in slide valve position.
The Motor Amps Load Limit protects the compressor from overloading by decreasing the compressor capacity if the motor amperage is at the Maximum Amps setpoint, or preventing an increase in capacity if the motor amperage is above the Full Load Amps setpoint. ( See manual for the appropriate microprocessor.)
NOTE Optical Actuators CAN NOT be manually rotated.
(The VSM 501-701 models will have motor locations opposite of figure #4-1)

4 ­ 2

Figure 4-1. Slide Valve Motor Location
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

Slide Valve Actuator Operation
The slide valve actuator is a gear-motor with a position sensor. The motor is powered in the forward and reverse directions from the main computer in the control panel. The position sensor tells the main computer the position of the slide valve. The main computer uses the position and process information to decide where to move the slide valve next.
The position sensors works by optically counting motor turns. On the shaft of the motor is a small aluminum "photochopper". It has a 180 degree fence that passes through the slots of two slotted optocouplers. The optocouplers have an infrared light emitting diode (LED) on one side of the slot and a phototransistor on the other. The phototransistor behaves as a light controlled switch. When the photochopper fence is blocking the slot, light from the LED is prevented from reaching the phototransistor and the switch is open. When photochopper fence is not blocking the slot, the switch is closed.
As the motor turns, the photochopper fence alternately blocks and opens the optocoupler slots, generating a sequence that the position sensor microcontroller can use to determine motor position by counting. Because the motor is connected to the slide valve by gears, knowing the motor position means knowing the slide valve position.

During calibration, the position sensor records the high and low count of motor turns. The operator tells the position sensor when the actuator is at the high or low position with the push button. Refer to the calibration instructions for the detailed calibration procedure.
The position sensor can get "lost" if the motor is moved while the position sensor is not powered. To prevent this, the motor can only be moved electrically while the position sensor is powered. When the position sensor loses power, power is cut to the motor. A capacitor stores enough energy to keep the position sensor circuitry alive long enough for the motor to come to a complete stop and then save the motor position to nonvolatile EEPROM memory. When power is restored, the saved motor position is read from EEPROM memory and the actuators resumes normal function
This scheme is not foolproof. If the motor is moved manually while the power is off or the motor brake has failed, allowing the motor to free wheel for too long after the position sensor looses power, the actuator will become lost.
A brake failure can sometimes be detected by the position sensor. If the motor never stops turning after a power loss, the position sensor detects this, knows it will be lost, and goes immediately into calibrate mode when power is restored.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 3

Section 4 · Operation
Calibrate Slide Valve Actuators (For Units Using Vission20/20TM)1
Slide valve actuators must be installed prior to calibration. Refer to Slide Valve Actuator Installation procedure. The following steps pertain to calibrating one slide valve actuator. Repeat procedure to calibrate other slide valve actuator.
WARNING
After stopping the compressor, allow the compressor and surrounding components to cool down prior to servicing. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
Do not calibrate in direct sunlight. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Both the capacity and volume slide actuators should be calibrated when one or more of these have occurred: · Compressor unit starting up for the first time. · A new actuator motor has been installed. · There is an error code flashing on the actuator's
circuit board - an attempt to recalibrate should be made.

· The range of travel is not correct and the command shaft travel is physically correct.
· The compressor is pulling high amperage, the calibration of the volume slide should be checked.
· An actuator does not unload below 5%, or an actuator that doesn't move.
· Something is not working properly such as the actuators, RTDs or transducers.
To calibrate optical actuators, continue with the following steps:
NOTE If the compressor unit is starting up for the first time or a new actuator motor has been installed, leave the power cable and position transmitter cable
disconnected until step 6.
1. Stop compressor unit and allow to cool. 2. Remove screws securing actuator cover to actuator
assembly. As a reference see Figure 4-2.
CAUTION
Wires are attached to the connector on the actuator cover. Handle actuator cover with care to prevent damage to wires. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment.

Actuator Assembly

View Rotate 180°

Actuator Plastic Cover

Red LED

Blue Calibrate Button
Figure 4-2. Actuator Assembly

1

Does not apply to compressors that operate

without slides (VSM-97, VSM-113, VSM-127).

4 ­ 4

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

3. Carefully lift actuator cover from actuator assembly and tilt towards connectors. Raise cover high
enough to be able to press the blue calibration but-
ton and be able to see the red LED on the top of assembly.

4. Logging on into the Vission20/20TM with high-level
access will prompt the Calibration buttons to appear, see Figure 4-3.

Calibration Buttons

Figure 4-3. Slide Valve Calibration Screen (Vission 20/20)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 5

Section 4 · Operation

5. On the main screen, press "Menu" then press the "Slide Calibration" button to enter the slide calibration screen, see Figure 4-4.

6. If the compressor unit is starting for the first time
or a new actuator was installed, connect connec-
tors of power cable and position transmitter cable to new actuator.

4 ­ 6

Figure 4-4. Menu Screen and Slide Calibration Button (Vission 20/20)
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

NOTE If the "+" (increase) and "-" (decrease) buttons do not
correspond to increase or decrease shaft rotation, swap the blue and brown wires of the "power cable" in the control panel. This will reverse the rotation of the
actuator/command shaft, see Figure 4-5.
Capacity actuator wires are connected on terminals 13 & 14. Volume actuator wires are connected on
terminals 15 & 16.
7. Press "+" or "-" to move the slide valve and check for the correct rotation, see Table 4-1.
NOTE When the actuator is in calibration mode, it outputs 0 V when the actuator is running and 5 V when it is still. Thus, as stated earlier, the actuator voltage will fluctuate during calibration. After the actuator has been calibrated, 0 V output will correspond to the minimum
position and 5 V to the maximum position.
8. Quickly press and release the blue push button on the actuator one time. This places the actuator in calibration mode. The red LED will begin flashing rapidly.

CAUTION
DO NOT CONTINUE TO ENERGIZE THE ACTUATOR MOTOR AFTER THE SLIDE HAS REACHED THE MECHANICAL STOP. Doing so may cause mechanical damage to the motor or shear the motor shaft key. When the slide has reached the mechanical stop position, press the button in the center of the photochopper to release the brake, and thereby release the
tension on the actuator motor.
NOTE The "Slide Calibration" screen on the Control Panel has a "Current" window, which displays the actuator output voltage. These values, (the % volume and the % capacity) displayed in the window are meaningless until
calibration has been completed.
9. Use the "-" button on the Control panel to drive the slide valve to its minimum "mechanical stop" position. Release the "-" button when the slowing of the motor rotation and a winding sound from the actuator motor is noted.

Capacity Actuator Wire connections (13, 14)
Volume Actuator Wire connections (15, 16)
Figure 4-5. Wire Connections for Capacity and Volume Actuators

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 7

Section 4 · Operation

Table 4-1. Command Shaft Rotation Specifications*

Compressor Model
VSM 71 VSM 91 VSM 101

Command Shaft Rotation

Capacity INC DEC

Volume INC DEC

No. of Turns/Rotation Capacity
Turns Degrees Travel

Angle/Slide Travel Volume
Turns Degrees Travel

VSM 151 VSM 181

CW CCW CW CCW 0.80

288 3.141" 0.45

162 1.767"

VSM 201

VSM 301

VSM 361 VSM 401

VSM 501

VSM 601

CCW CW CCW CW 0.91

VSM 701

VSS/VSSH 291

VSS/VSSH 341

VSS/VSSH 451 CW

CCW

CW

CCW

0.91

328 3.568" 0.52 328 3.568" 0.52

187 2.045" 187 2.045"

VSS/VSSH 601

VSS 751 VSS 901

CCW CW CCW CW

1.09

392 4.283" 0.63

227 2.473"

VSS/VSH 791 VSS/VSH 891

VSS/VSH 1051 CCW CW CCW CW

1.22

439 4.777" 0.74

266 2.889"

VSS/VSH 1201

VSS/VSH 1301

VSS 1501

CCW CW CCW CW

1.36

490 5.325" 0.82

295 3.200"

VSS 1551

CCW CW CCW CW

1.48

533 5.823" 0.87

313 3.433"

VSS 1801

CCW CW CCW CW

1.36

490 5.325" 0.82

295 3.200"

VSS 1851

CCW CW CCW CW

1.48

533 5.823" 0.87

313 3.433"

VSS 2101

VSS 2401

VSS 2601 VSS 2801

CCW CW CCW CW

1.80

648 7.072" 1.36

490 5.341"

VSS 3001
*The large gear on the command shaft has 50 teeth. The teeth are counted when moving the command shaft from the minimum stop position to the maximum stop position.

The manual operating shaft on the gear motor should be turned the opposite direction of the desired command shaft rotation.

The capacity and volume control motors are equipped with a brake, if it is necessary to operate the control motors manually, the brake must be disengaged. The brake can be disengaged by pushing on the motor shaft on the cone end. The shaft should be centered in its travel. Do not use excessive force manually operating the motor or damage may result.

4 ­ 8

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

10. Press and hold down on the photo-chopper shaft to disengage the brake slowly, releasing tension from the motor mount, see Figure 4-6. Use the "+" button to pulse the actuator to where the slide is just off of the mechanical stop and there is no tension on the motor shaft.
11. Quickly press and release the blue button on the actuator again. The red LED will now flash at a slower rate, indication that the minimum slide valve position (zero position) has been set.
12. Use the "+" button on the Control panel to drive the slide to its maximum "mechanical stop" position. Release the "+" button when the slowing of the motor rotation and a winding sound from the actuator motor is noted.
NOTE If the photo-chopper spins faster than 4800 rpm, the actuator will go into an over speed fault and
recalibration will be required.
13. Press and hold down on the photo-chopper shaft to disengage the brake slowly, releasing tension from the motor mount. Use the "-" button to pulse the actuator to where the slide is just off of its mechanical stop and there is no tension on the motor shaft.

NOTE After the blue button is pressed for the third time, an mV reading will be displayed in the Current field. Make sure the mV value is at least 150 to 200 mV higher than
the max setpoint on the screen.
14. Quickly press and release the blue button on the actuator one more time. The red LED will stop flashing. The actuator is now calibrated and knows the minimum and maximum positions of the slide valve it controls.
Now the Capacity Channel is automatically calibrated based on the calibration settings made to the actuator.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten screws. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
15. Gently lower the plastic cover over the top of the actuator to where it contacts the base and O-ring seal. After making sure the cover is seated properly, gently tighten the four #10 screws.
16. Repeat procedure to calibrate other slide valve actuator.

Figure 4-6. Photo-chopper
Press down on Photo-chopper to release tension from mo-
tor mount.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 9

Section 4 · Operation

Calibrate Slide Valve Actuators (For Units Using Compact Logix PLC)
Slide valve actuators must be installed prior to calibration. Refer to Slide Valve Actuator Installation procedure. The following steps pertain to calibrating one slide valve actuator. Repeat procedure to calibrate other slide valve actuator.
WARNING
After stopping the compressor, allow the compressor and surrounding components to cool down prior to servicing. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
Do not calibrate in direct sunlight. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
Both the capacity and volume slide actuators should be calibrated when one or more of these have occurred: · Compressor unit starting up for the first time.
· A new actuator motor has been installed.
· There is an error code flashing on the actuator's circuit board - an attempt to recalibrate should be made.

· The range of travel is not correct and the command shaft travel is physically correct.
· The compressor is pulling high amperage, the calibration of the volume slide should be checked.
· An actuator does not unload below 5%, or an actuator that doesn't move.
· Something is not working properly such as the actuators, RTDs or transducers.
To calibrate optical actuators, continue with the following steps:
NOTE If the compressor unit is starting up for the first time or a new actuator motor has been installed, leave the power cable and position transmitter cable
disconnected until step 7.
1. Stop compressor unit and allow to cool. 2. Remove screws securing actuator cover to actuator
assembly. As a reference see Figure 4-7.

Actuator Assembly

View Rotate 180°

Actuator Plastic Cover

Red LED

4 ­ 10

Blue Calibrate Button
Figure 4-7. Actuator Assembly
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

CAUTION
Wires are attached to the connector on the actuator cover. Handle actuator cover with care to prevent damage to wires. Failure to comply may result in
damage to equipment.
3. Carefully lift actuator cover from actuator assembly and tilt towards Turck connectors. Raise cover high enough to be able to press the blue calibration button and be able to see the red LED on the top of assembly.
4. On the main screen of the PLC, press "Menu", then "Instrument Calibration" button to enter the instrument calibration overview screen, then press "Calibrate Slides" button to enter the slide calibration screen, see Figure 4-8.
5. Logging on with high-level access will prompt the "Enter Slide Calibration Mode" button to appear.
6. Press "Enter Slide Calibration Mode" button to initiate calibration mode. The Slide Calibration button turns green and Set Max and Set Min buttons appear, see Figure 4-9.
7. If the compressor unit is starting for the first time or a new actuator was installed, connect connectors of power cable and position transmitter cable to new actuator.
NOTE If the UP (increase) and DOWN (decrease) buttons do
not correspond to increase (INC) or decrease (DEC) shaft rotation, swap the blue and brown wires of the "power cable" in the control panel. This will reverse the
rotation of the actuator/command shaft.
8. Press UP or DOWN to move the slide valve and check for the correct rotation, see Table 4-1.
NOTE When the actuator is in calibration mode, it outputs 0V when the actuator is running and 5V when it is still. Thus, as stated earlier, the actuator voltage will fluctuate during calibration. After the actuator has been calibrated, 0V output will correspond to the minimum
position and 5V to the maximum position.
9. Quickly press and release the blue push button on the actuator one time. This places the actuator in calibration mode. The red LED will begin flashing rapidly.

CAUTION
DO NOT CONTINUE TO ENERGIZE THE ACTUATOR MOTOR AFTER THE SLIDE HAS REACHED THE MECHANICAL STOP. Doing so may cause mechanical damage to the motor or shear the motor shaft key. When the slide has reached the mechanical stop position, press the button in the center of the photochopper to release the brake, and thereby release the
tension on the actuator motor.
NOTE The "Slide calibration" screen on the Control Panel has a "Current" window, which displays twice the actuator
output voltage. This value, (the % volume and the % capacity) displayed in the "Current Vol" and Current Cap" Windows are meaningless until calibration has
been completed.
10. Use the DOWN button on the Control panel to drive the slide valve to its minimum "mechanical stop" position. Release the DOWN button when the slowing of the motor rotation and a winding sound from the actuator motor is noted.
11. Press down on the photo-chopper shaft to disengage the brake, releasing tension from the motor mount, see Figure 4-10. Use the UP button to pulse the actuator to where the slide is just off of the mechanical stop and there is no tension on the motor shaft.
12. Quickly press and release the blue button on the actuator again. The red LED will now flash at a slower rate, indication that the minimum slide valve position (zero position) has been set.
13. Use the UP button on the Control panel to drive the slide to its maximum "mechanical stop" position. Release the UP button when the slowing of the motor rotation and a winding sound from the actuator motor is noted.
14. Press down on the photo-chopper shaft to disengage the brake, releasing tension from the motor mount. Use the DOWN button to pulse the actuator to where the slide is just off of its mechanical stop and there is no tension on the motor shaft.
15. Quickly press and release the blue button on the actuator one more time. The red LED will stop flashing. The actuator is now calibrated and knows the minimum and maximum positions of the slide valve it controls. Now the capacity or volume channel of the PLC can be calibrated.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 11

Section 4 · Operation

Figure 4-8. Overview, Main Menu and Instrument Calibration Screens (Compact Logix PLC)

4 ­ 12

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

Figure 4-9. Slide Calibration Screen (Compact Logix PLC)
Screen colors inverted for ease of reading.

Figure 4-10. Photo-chopper
Press down on Photo-chopper to release tension from motor shaft.
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 13

Section 4 · Operation

16. Use the DOWN button to move the actuator to-
wards its minimum position while watching the mV readout on the Control Panel screen. Discontinue pressing the DOWN button when the mV reading the "Current" window above the "Set Min" button is approximately 500 mV.
17. Now use the DOWN or UP buttons to position the
slide valve until a value close to 300 mV is on the screen. Then, press the "Set Min" button in the ca-
pacity or volume slide valve window to tell the controller that this is the minimum mV position. Note: The value in the "Current Cap" or "Current Vol" window has no meaning right now.
18. Use the UP button to rotate the actuator towards its
maximum position while watching the mV readout on the controller screen. Discontinue pressing the UP button when the mV reading in the "Current" window is approximately 4800 mV. You are nearing the mechanical stop position.
19. Pulse the UP button to carefully move the slide valve until the mV readout "saturates", or stops increasing. This is around 4800 mV Record mV maximum reading.
20. Pulse the DOWN button until the mV just start to decrease. (This is the point where the channel drops out of saturation). Adjust mV value to 300 mV below recorded maximum mV.
21. Press the "Set Max" button.
22. Press the "Main" button to complete calibration and exit the "Slide Calibration" screen. The con-
troller will automatically energize the actuator and
drive it back to its minimum position (below 5%) for pre-start-up.

NOTE Now the "Current Cap" or the "Current Vol" value will be displayed in the window on the "Main" screen and
the "Slide Calibration" screen.
23. Gently lower the plastic cover over the top of the actuator to where it contacts the base and O-ring seal.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten screws. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
24. Check and make sure the cover is seated properly, then gently tighten the four #10 screws.
25. Enable the "Slide Non-Movement Alarm" by going to the "Setup" menu and choosing "Alarm Enable" for the "Slide Non-Movement Option".
26. Repeat procedure to calibrate other slide valve actuator.

4 ­ 14

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

Compressor Control with Vission20/20TM Micro-controller (No Slide Operation)
The Vission20/20TM panel can provide control for a single screw compressor without slides as long as Analog Output Board #10 is present and selected in the Configuration screen, see FIgure 4-11.
The "No Slide" operation will become active once the correct type of compressor and model has been chosen, see Figure 4-12.
The user must select either VSG/VSH or VSM from the Compressor combo box in page 2 of the Configuration Menu, and then the Model from the next box.
The choice of this type of compressor will cause the refrigerant combo box to be grayed out.

Once the compressor has been selected, the Vission 20/20TM panel touchscreen will show an indicator of VFD speed percentage, and buttons to increase and decrease it.
For more information on VFD capacity control, please check the Vission20/20TM manual (35391SC).
WARNING
Software programming credentials shall only be made available by the supplier. The user will only have access to operational features established by the supplier. Failure to comply may result in serious injury
or death.

Figure 4-11. Vission 20/20 Configuration Screen - I/O
Configuration (Page 8)

FIgure 4-12. Compressor and Model Setup with Vission 20/20

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 15

Section 4 · Operation

Suction Equalizing Line Setup - For VSS/VSM Compressors
The suction equalizing line allows system pressure to equalize to suction pressure during shutdown periods. The line is connected before the suction stop/check valve to after the suction strainer, see Figure 4-13.
NOTE Valve adjustment depends on size of oil separator and how quickly system pressure should equalize to suction pressure. The larger the oil separator the longer system
pressure will take to equalize to suction pressure.

1. To open valve, turn counterclockwise. To close valve, turn clockwise.
2. Fully close valve to a stop.
3. Turn valve to fully open position while counting number of turns to fully open. Note total number of turns.
4. Adjust valve to be half open. Close valve to half of the number of total turns.
5. If suction pressure needs to equalize slower, turn valve towards closed position.
6. If suction pressure needs to equalize faster, turn valve towards open position.

Suction Equalizing Valve
Suction Equalizing Line
Figure 4-13. Suction Equalizing Line and Valve
NOTE For VSH/VSSH compressors, suction equalizing is automatically controlled.

4 ­ 16

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 4 · Operation

Stop/Check Valve Operation1

Table 4-2. Stop/Check Valve Open Positions

Valve Size

1.5"

2"

2.5"

3"

4"

5"

6"

8"

Number of Turns Open (From Closed Position)

2

2.25

2.75

3.25

4.5

3.75

5.75

7.75

Auto:
In the "Auto Position", the stop valve is operating as a check valve, allowing flow in the directions of the arrows.
To set the valve to the automatic position, fully close the valve, and turn the stem out as indicated by the chart below.

Closed:
In the manually "Closed Position", the stop check is operating as a conventional stop valve, not allowing flow in either direction.

Open:
In the manually " Open Position", with the valve stem fully back seated, the valve disc is lifted slightly, allowing flow in either direction.

1

Doesn´t apply to: VSM-97, VSM-113, VSM-127

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

4 ­ 17

4 ­ 18 / Blank VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

200 5,000 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
Maintenance and Service Schedule - For VSS/VSM Unit Only
Follow this table for maintaining and servicing the compressor unit at hourly intervals.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Group

Table 5-1. Maintenance/Service Schedule - For VSS/VSM Unit Only
Service Interval (Hours)
Inspection/ Maintenance

Oil Circuit
Compressor Unit
Control Calibration
Compressor

Oil Change (1)

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

R

Oil Analysis (2)

-

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Oil Filters (3)

RRRRRRRRRRRRRR

Oil Strainers

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Coalescing Filter

-

-

-

-

R

-

-

R

-

-

R

-

-

R

Coalescing Drain Line

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Suction Screen

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Liquid Line Strainers

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Coupling Alignment and Integrity

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Motor (Compressor)

See Motor Manual for proper lubrication procedures and service intervals.

Transducers

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

RTDs/ TTs

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Slide Valve Motors

Slide valve calibration should be inspected monthly. Inspections can be performed through the control panel. If a Non-Movement Alarm appears, calibrate immediately.

Compressor w Slides (4)

-

I

-

I

-

I

-

I

-

I

-

I

-

I

Compressor w/o Slides (5) -

-

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Inspect for Back Spin

Inspect Every 5,000 Hours or As Needed

Inspect for Leak

Check Monthly

Bearings

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

I

I = Inspect S = Sampling R = Replace (1) The oil should be changed at these intervals, unless oil analysis results exceed the allowable limits. The frequency of changes will depend on the system cleanliness.
(2) Oil analysis should be done at these intervals as a minimum; the frequency of analysis will depend on system cleanliness. (3) The oil filter(s) on a minimum must be changed at these intervals or annually if not run continuously. However, the oil filter(s) must be changed if the oil filter differential
exceeds 12 psi or oil analysis requires it. (4) Inspection includes - Gaterotor Inspection (backlash measurement, shelf clearance and gaterotor float), End Play Measurement (main rotor & gaterotor), Slide Valve
Inspection (if applicable).
(5) For compressors with no slides (VSM-97, VSM-113, VSM-127)

5 ­ 1

200 5,000 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
Maintenance and Service Schedule - For VSH/VSSH Unit Only
Follow this table for maintaining and servicing the heat pump at hourly intervals.

5 ­ 2

Group

Inspection/ Maintenance

Table 5-2a. Maintenance/Service Schedule (For VSH/VSSH Unit Only) Service Interval (Hours)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Oil Circuit
Compressor Unit
Control Calibration Compressor

Oil Change (1) Oil Analysis (2) Oil Filters (3) Oil Strainers Coalescing Filter Coalescing Drain Line Suction Screen Liquid Line Strainers Coupling Alignment and Integrity Motor (Compressor) Transducers RTDs/ TTs
Slide Valve Motors
Compressor Inspect for Back Spin Inspect for Leak

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

R

-

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

RRRRRRRRRRRRRR

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

-

-

-

-

R

-

-

R

-

-

R

-

-

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

See Motor Manual for proper lubrication procedures and service intervals.

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Slide valve calibration should be inspected monthly. Inspections can be performed through the control panel. If a Non-Movement Alarm appears, calibrate immediately.

See Table 5-2b for Service Schedule Timeline details

Inspect Every 5,000 Hours or As Needed

Check Monthly

I = Inspect S = Sampling R = Replace (1) The oil should be changed at these intervals, unless oil analysis results exceed the allowable limits. The frequency of changes will depend on the system cleanliness.
(2) Oil analysis should be done at these intervals as a minimum; the frequency of analysis will depend on system cleanliness. (3) The oil filter(s) on a minimum must be changed at these intervals or annually if not run continuously. However, the oil filter(s) must be changed if the oil filter dif-
ferential exceeds 12 psi or oil analysis requires it.

5,000 7500 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 50,000 55,000 60,000 65,000 70,000 75,000 80,000 85,000 90,000 95,000 100,000

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Discharge Pressure (PSIG)

Differentinal Pressure (PSIG)

Table 5-2b. Maintenance/Service Schedule (For VSH/VSSH Compressor Only)
Service Interval (Hours)

200- 300 - - - I - - - I - - - I - - I - - I - - R

300(1) - 800

300 - 400 400- 500

- I - I - I -R- I - I - I - I - IRI I - I - I -R- I - I -R- I - I -R- I

500- 600

I - I - IRI - I -R- I - IRI - I -R I = Inspect* R = Replace Bearings & Inspect per Chart

Notes: *: Inspection includes - Gaterotor Inspection (backlash measurement, shelf clearance and gaterotor float), End Play Measurement (main rotor & gaterotor), Slide Valve Inspection (if applicable).
(1): For Discharge pressure under 300 PSIG, please use Table 5-1a for maintenance and service schedule.

NOTE Upon Inspection, if any component shows wear beyond what is allowed in the Service section of this document, the component(s)
must be replaced.

5 ­ 3

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Preventive Maintenance, Checks and Services

13. Operate compressor capacity and volume ratio controls through their range both automatically and manually.

Careful checking of a refrigeration system for leaks and proper operation of all components upon installation will start the system on its way to a long life of satisfactory service. To ensure the desired trouble-free operation, however, a systematic maintenance program is a prerequisite. The following PMCS is suggested in addition to the Maintenance/Service Schedule.

Trimonthly
(Approximately 2000 operating hours)
A. Check movement of compressor rotor at drive coupling end to determine bearing float, see Compressor Shaft Bearing Float Inspections.

NOTE After any maintenance work, the workplace should
be cleaned and free from any hazards.

Annually
(Items 1 thru 13 and "A" above plus 14 thru 31)

Daily
1. Check oil levels.
2. Check all pressure and temperature readings.
3. Check micronic oil filter inlet and outlet pressures for excessive pressure drop. Change filter when pressure drop exceeds 45 psi or every six months, whichever occurs first. For proper procedure for changing micronic oil filter and for charging oil into the system, see Operation Section.
4. Clean strainers each time filter cartridge if replaced.
5. Check compressor sound for abnormal noises.
6. Check shaft seals for excessive oil leakage. A small amount of oil leakage (approximately 6 to 15 drops per hour) is normal. This allows lubrication of the seal faces.

14. Check entire system thoroughly for leaks.
15. Remove all rust from equipment, clean and paint.
16. Grease valve stems and threads for the valve caps.
17. Flush out sediment, etc. from water circuits.
18. Clean all oil strainers.
19. Clean suction strainer ­ compressors.
20. Check motors and fans for shaft wear and end play.
21. Check operation and general condition of microprocessor and other electrical controls.
· Check fuses in the Vission20/20 or PLC panel.
· Check for loose wiring connections in the Vission 20/20 or PLC panel.
· Check relay and contact operation for relays in the Vission20/20 or PLC panel.
· Verify set points in the Vission20/20 or PLC.

Weekly
(Items 1 thru 6 above plus 7 thru 9) 7. Check the refrigeration system for leaks with a suit-
able leak detector. 8. Check oil pressures and review microprocessor log
and log sheets. 9. Check refrigerant levels in vessels.
Monthly
(Items 1 thru 8 above plus 9 thru 13) 10. Oil all motors and bearings. Follow manufacturer's
instructions on lubrication. 11. Check calibration and operation of all controls, par-
ticularly safety controls. 12. Check oil cooler for any evidence of corrosion, scal-
ing or other fouling.

22. Clean all water strainers. 23. Check drains to make sure water will flow away
from equipment.
24. Drain and clean entire oil system at receiver drain. Recharge with new clean moisture free oil. For proper procedure for changing micronic oil filter and charging oil into the system, see Start-Up and Operation section.
25. Check compressor coupling. For integrity and alignment.
26. Check oil pump for wear.
27. Check the calibration of the microprocessor pressure transducers and RTD's for accuracy.
28. Check mounting bolts for compressor and motor.
29. Verify the operation of the suction and discharge check valves.
30. Check setup of soft starts and VFDs.
31. Check oil heater operation.

5 ­ 4

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Compressor Unit Isolation For Maintenance/Service (Compressors with Slide Valves)
WARNING
Avoid skin contact with any liquid refrigerant or oil. Wear rubber gloves and a face shield when working with liquid refrigerant or oil. Failure to comply may
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
When working with refrigerants, ensure there is adequate ventilation and refrigerant vapor detectors as per ASHRAE standards. Failure to comply may
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
At shutdown, open any other valves that may trap liquids to prevent serious injury and/or damage to
equipment.
WARNING
Follow local lock-out/tag-out procedure. Compressors must be depressurized before attempting to do any work on them. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury, death and/or damage to equipment.
NOTICE
Recover or transfer all refrigerant vapor in accordance with local ordinances before opening any part of the
package unit to atmosphere.

1. Shut down the compressor unit, refer to Stopping/ Restarting procedure in Section 4.
2. Turn motor and oil pump starter disconnect switches into the OFF position. Lock-out/tag-out disconnect switches.
3. If suction equalizing valve is not open, open it to allow oil separator pressure to vent to low-side system pressure, see Figure 5-1. Close valve when complete.
4. Isolate the compressor unit by closing all valves to the house system. Lock-out/tag-out valves.
NOTE If drain valves are installed on suction and discharge headers, open these valves too to remove build up
of liquid during shut-down periods.
5. Open any other valves that may trap gas or liquid. Lock-out/tag-out valves.
6. Recover and/or transfer all vapors per local/state codes and policies.
7. Servicing the compressor unit can proceed at this point. After servicing, ensure to perform a leak check, see Compressor Unit Leak Check procedure.

The compressor unit must be isolated and depressurized to atmosphere prior to servicing.

Suction Equalizing Valve

Suction Equalizing Line

Discharge Bleed Valve

Figure 5-1. Discharge Bleed Valve, Suction Equalizing Line and Valve
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 5

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Recommendations when Servicing (Compressors Without Slide Valves)
When working on the compressor, care must be taken to ensure that contaminants (i.e. water from melting ice, dirt and dust) do not enter the compressor while it is being serviced. It is essential that all dust, oil or ice that has accumulated on the outside of the compressor be removed before servicing the compressor.
After servicing the compressor, all gaskets, O-rings, roll pins and lock washers must be replaced when reassembling the compressor.
Preparation of Unit For Servicing
WARNING
Follow local lock-out/tag-out procedure. Compressors must be depressurized before attempting to do any work on them. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury, death and/or damage to equipment.
A) Shut down the unit, open the electrical disconnect switch and pull the fuses for the compressor motor to prevent the unit from starting. Put a lock on the disconnect switch and tag the switch to indicate that maintenance is being performed.
WARNING
Be cautious when isolating sections of CO2 piping. CO2 has a very steep pressure curve, and as sections containing CO2 warm up, pressures can rise
dramatically & well beyond system design.
WARNING
When working with LFG, NG or other dangerous or flammable gases, ensure there are adequate ventilation and vapor detectors. Refer to national fire and building codes. Failure to comply may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Avoid skin contact with any condensate or oil. Wear rubber gloves and a face shield when working with condensate or oil. Failure to comply may result in
serious injury or death.

B) Isolate the unit by manually closing the discharge Stop valve. Allow the unit to equalize to suction pressure before closing the Suction Bypass. After the unit has equalized to suction pressure and suction valve closed, use an acceptable means to depressurize the unit that complies with all Local, State and Federal Ordinances.
WARNING
At shutdown, open any other valves that may trap liquids to prevent serious injury and/or damage to
equipment.
NOTICE
Recover or transfer all gas vapor in accordance with local ordinances before opening the compressor unit
to the atmosphere.
C) Remove drain plugs from the bottom of compressor housing and the discharge manifold. Drain the oil into appropriate containers.

5 ­ 6

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Compressor Unit Leak Check After Servicing
The compressor unit must be checked for leaks after servicing to ensure a tight system. For additional leak testing information, refer to Chapter VI of ASME B31.3 Process Piping Code.
CAUTION
Do not hydro test compressor unit. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
1. If servicing the compressor unit was completed, proceed to step 2. Otherwise, isolate the compressor unit from the house system, see Compressor Unit Isolation procedure.
2. Open all shut-off valves, check valves, control valves and solenoid valves in the system to be tested.
3. Slowly pressurize compressor unit through suction oil charging port with dry nitrogen.
4. Using appropriate soap solution, check for leaks on joints and connections of the serviced component.
5. If leaks are found, depressurize system and fix leaks. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all leaks are fixed.
6. Evacuate from suction oil charging port.
7. Close all valves previously opened in the system. Remove tags as per the local lock-out/tag-out procedure.
8. Turn the motor and oil pump disconnect switches to the ON position.
9. Return compressor unit to service. Oil System Components

Oil Sampling
WARNING
When working with LFG, NG or other dangerous or flammable gases, ensure there are adequate ventilation and vapor detectors. Refer to national fire and building codes. Failure to comply may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Improper selection or application of fluid diagnostic products can cause serious injury or damage. The user is solely responsible for making the final selection of products to ensure that the overall system performance and safety requirements are met. These include reviewing fluid compatibility with materials
and seals.
WARNING
Avoid skin contact with any condensate or oil. Wear rubber gloves and a face shield when working with condensate or oil. Failure to comply may result in
serious injury or death.
DANGER
Sampling often releases hot fluid under high velocity/pressure.
1. Hot fluid can cause severe burn injuries. 2. Skin penetration from high-pressure fluid
can occur, causing severe injury, gangrene and/or death. If this happens, immediately contact an experienced medical practitioner. 3. Hot fluid escaping to the atmosphere can ignite if it comes into contact with an ignition source. This can lead to severe property damage.

Recommendations
1. Make sure you´re aware of the risks associated with the fluid being sampled or worked with. Check with the manufacturer.
2. If you have not been trained to sample, service, repair, or troubleshoot a pressurized fluid system, especially a hydraulic system, you are at risk of suffering an accident. Seek the proper training before proceeding.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 7

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Installation of The Oil Sampler Valve
1. Lubricate the threads (1/4"-18 NPT) with Teflon tape.
2. Tighten to the max. torque 25 ft-lbs (34 N-m). Use 11/16" open wrench. Avoid over tightening.
Pre-Sampling
Use the Vilter Oil Analysis Kit (VPN 3097A) to collect an oil sample for analysis, see Figure 5-2.
Once the sample has been taken, the label must be filled out and pasted on the bottle, and both must be placed inside the mailing tube and sealed with the preaddressed mailing label.
Below are a few points to remember when taking a sample:
· Sample running compressor units, not cold units. Sample after minimum 30 minutes of compressor operating time.
· Sample after the oil filter.
· Sample according to the sampling procedure below.
· Ensure sampling valves and devices are thoroughly flushed prior to taking a sample.
· Ensure samples are taken as scheduled in the Maintenance and Service Schedule.
· Send samples to the oil analysis lab immediately after sampling, do not wait 24 hours.

Sampling Procedure
THE SAMPLING PRESSURE RANGE IS LIMITED BETWEEN 5 TO 750 PSI (0.03 ­ 5.17 MPa). IF THE OPERATING PRESSURE IS ABOVE 750 PSI (5.17 MPa), THE OIL SAMPLING MUST BE DONE WHEN THE COMPRESSOR IS NOT RUNNING AND ENSURE THE SYSTEM PRESSURE IS WITHIN THE 5 TO 750 PSI (0.03 ­ 5.17 MPa) SAMPLING RANGE.
A 1/4" NPT oil sampling valve is provided either in the oil filter canister cover or in the piping after the filter (See Figure 5-3 or 5-4(a) according to application).
1. Unthread the oil sampling valve cap. For valve #3709A, you also need to turn the knurled locknut clockwise, see Figure 5-4 (b).
NOTE DO NOT remove the valve from the piping or filter
housing.
2. Remove the cap of the oil analysis bottle and position it carefully under the valve spout. (Make sure the valve spout is rotated to the downward position) SLOWLY AND VERY CAREFULLY press the "PUSH BUTTON" with your finger to open the valve, and release the button to close it, see Figure 5-5.
WARNING
If the valve is opened too rapidly, a foamy pressurized jet of oil will gush out and splash outside the container.

Figure 5-2. Oil Analysis Kit (VPN 3097A)

Figure 5-3. Oil Sampler Valve (VPN #3708A) For Gas Compression Applications

5 ­ 8

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
(a) Oil Sampler Valve for Ammonia and Other Refrigerants Applications
(b) Valve shown ready for oil sampling

(c) Valve shown in lockout position

Figure 5-4. Oil Sampling Valve (VPN #3709A) For Ammonia and Refrigerant Compressors

Button being pressed, valve open

Button released, valve closed

Figure 5-5. Operating the Oil Sampling Valve
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 9

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

3. In most cases there will be foam in the oil, so you must fill the bottle up to the top and then wait for the foam to dissipate. Repeat this step as many times as necessary (around 4 to 6 times) until the clear oil level reaches ¾ full, see sequence in Figure 5-6.
4. After all the foam dissipates, tighten the sample bottle cap.
5. Tighten the oil sampling valve cap.
6. For valve #3709A only: back seat the knurled locknut by turning it counter-clockwise. This is to prevent any accidental release, see Figure 5-4 (c).
7. Attach the filled sampling information label to the bottle and mail the sample out to the oil analysis lab immediately.
NOTE Missing information from the sampling label may result in longer turnaround time as the laboratory will need to request the info before the sample can
be tested.

Oil Sample Analysis Report
NOTE A copy of the oil analysis report is also sent to Vilter. See Appendices for a sample of the oil analysis
report.
An oil analysis report will show the physical properties of the oil, such as: · Water content · Viscosity · Acid number · Particle count · Antioxidant level · Wear metals · Contaminating/additive metals

Figure 5-6. Stages of the Oil Sample Taking Process

5 ­ 10

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Compressor Replacement
Notify VilterTM prior to performing a compressor replacement. See Warranty instructions in Section 7.
Removal
To replace a compressor on a unit, proceed with the following steps:
NOTICE
Dispose of used oil in an appropriate manner following all Local, State and Federal laws and ordinances.
1. Shut down and isolate the compressor unit, see Compressor Unit Isolation for Maintenance and Service procedure.
NOTE Note location of cables to aid in installation.
2. Disconnect all cables from sensors on compressor and actuators.
3. Remove coupling guard, see Coupling Guard Replacement procedure.
4. Remove drive coupling, see appropriate Drive Coupling Replacement procedure.
5. Remove center member, see Drive Coupling Removal procedure.
NOTE Use appropriate supporting equipment to support and keep motor, C-flange and compressor leveled.
6. If equipped with C-flange, remove bolts securing C-flange to compressor.

7. Using appropriate drain pan, drain oil by removing drain plugs from under compressor housing and discharge manifold. Allow oil to completely drain.
8. Remove all oil lines from the compressor.
9. Support suction line with appropriate supporting equipment.
10. Remove nuts and bolts securing suction strainer/ check valve assembly to suction stop valve and compressor.
11. Using appropriate lifting device, remove suction strainer/check valve assembly from compressor.
12. Remove nuts and bolts securing discharge pipe to compressor and oil separator, see Figure 5-7.
13. Remove discharge pipe and gaskets from compressor and oil separator.
14. Remove nuts, flat washers, lock washers and studs securing compressor to frame.
15. Remove any additional lines and/or components to allow removal of compressor as required.
NOTE Refer to Bareshaft Compressor Lifting Points and Weights portion in Section 3 for appropriate lifting
hole sizes, weights and lifting points.
16. Install appropriate lifting eyes on top of compressor. See Table 3-1, 3-2, and Figure 3-1 to 3-6.
17. Using appropriate lifting device and additional personnel, remove compressor from frame.
Compressor

Nut Lock Washer
Flat Washer

Frame

Shim Stud

Spherical Washer Assembly

Flat Washer Lock Washer Nut

Figure 5-7. Compressor Replacement and Hardware Assembly (VSS 2401-3001 Shown)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 11

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

18. Remove shims and spherical washers from compressor mounting locations.
19. Inspect shims and spherical washers for damage, replace as required.
Installation
20. Install shims and spherical washers on compressor mounting locations, see Figure 5-7.
21. Install appropriate lifting eyes on top of compressor. See Table 3-1, 3-2, and Figure 3-1 to 3-6
NOTE Refer to Bareshaft Compressor Lifting Points and Weights portion in Section 3 for appropriate lifting
hole sizes, weights and lifting points.
22. Using appropriate lifting device, position compressor on compressor mounting locations on frame.
23. Loosely install studs, lock washers, flat washers and nuts to secure compressor to frame until alignment is correct.
24. Check compressor for soft foot. Add or remove shims as required until measurements are within +/- 0.002".
25. Tighten nuts to secure compressor to frame, refer to Appendix A.

26. If equipped with C-flange, install bolts to secure C-flange to compressor. Tighten bolts, see Appendix A.
27. Install drive coupling, see appropriate Drive Coupling Replacement procedure.
28. Install center member, see Drive Center Member Installation and Alignment procedure.
29. Install coupling guard, see Coupling Guard Replacement procedure.
30. Install nuts and bolts to secure discharge pipe to oil separator and compressor.
31. Tighten nuts on `discharge pipe-to-compressor flange' first, then tighten nuts on `discharge pipeto-oil separator flange', see Appendix A.
32. Install nuts to secure suction strainer/check valve assembly to compressor and suction stop valve.
33. Tighten nuts on `suction strainer/check valve assembly-to-compressor' first, then tighten nuts on `suction strainer/check valve assembly-to-suction stop valve', refer to Appendix A.
34. Install all lines to compressor.
35. Install all cables to sensors on compressor and actuator.
36. Perform leak check, see Compressor Unit Leak Check procedure.

5 ­ 12

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Compressor Inspection
Compressor Shaft Bearing Clearance Inspections
If clearance measurements are out of tolerance, contact Vilter Technical Support for further assistance.
CAUTION
When taking the measurements, do not exceed 300 to 500 lbs of force at point of contact or damage may result to the bearings.
Determine Maximum Applied Force To determine maximum applied force, take maximum applied force at hub/shaft multiplied by length of A and divide by length B. This is the maximum force that should be applied on the lever.
(Applied Force x A)/B = Applied Force (Maximum)

Main Rotor Bearing Axial Clearance Inspection
To inspect bearing axial clearance, proceed with the following steps:
1. Remove center member, see appropriate Drive Coupling Replacement procedure.
2. Install dial indicator to the compressor frame and zero indicator, see Figure 5-8.
3. Place lever arm and fulcrum behind compressor coupling half and push the coupling towards the motor. Record measurement.
4. Re-zero indicator, now position the fulcrum on the motor and use the lever arm to push the input shaft towards the compressor. Record measurement
5. Add both measurements. If measurement is out of allowable tolerance shown in Table 5-3, the bearing may need to be replaced. Contact VilterTM Technical Support.
Top View
Shaft being pushed by use of lever.

So, using a 36" (or 1 m) lever with pivot space of 6" (or 15 cm) would make the maximum applied force to be 60 lbf (or 235 N). Calculation is as follows:

Direction of shaft movement.

(300 lbf x 6")/30" = 60 lbf (Max. Applied Force) (1335 N x 15 cm)/85 cm = 235 N (Max. Applied Force)

Applied Force

Force at Hub/Shaft

A B
Pivot Point

Lever
Wooden Block or Fulcrum

Rigidly attach dial indicator. Position on axis of compressor.
Applied Force

Small wooden block or fulcrum.

Top View
Shaft being pushed by use of lever.
Rigidly attach dial indicator. Position on axis of compressor.
Direction of shaft movement.

As a quick reference, Table 5-3 shows maximum applied forces for 36" lever with 6" pivot for all compressor models.

Wooden block or fulcrum

Applied Force

Figure 5-8. Bearing Axial Clearance Inspection

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 13

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
Main Rotor Bearing Radial Clearance Inspection 6. Install dial indicator to the compressor frame and
zero indicator, see Figure 5-9.
NOTE Do not exceed maximum applied force. For maximum applied forces of all compressor models,
see Table 5-3.
7. Place lever arm and fulcrum underneath hub and push hub upwards. Record measurement.
8. If measurement is out of allowable tolerance shown in Table 5-3, the bearing may need to be replaced. Contact VilterTM Technical Support.

Side View
Shaft being pushed by use of lever. Rigidly attach dial indicator.
Direction of shaft movement. Applied Force
Figure 5-9. Bearing Radial Clearance Inspection

Table 5-3. Maximum Main Rotor Bearing Clearance

Max. Axial

Compressor Clearance

Model

in. (mm)

Max. Radial
Clearance
in. (mm)

Max. Force at
Hub/Shaft
lbf (N)

97-127
151, 181, 201, 152, 182, 202, 301, 361, 401
501, 601, 701
291, 341, 451, 601
751, 901
791, 891, 1051, 1201,
1301 1501, 1551, 1801, 1851,
2101
2401, 2601, 2801, 3001

0.002 (0.051)

0.004 (0.102)
0.006 (0.152)
0.007 (0.178) 0.007 (0.178) 0.006 (0.152)
0.006 (0.152)
0.007 (0.178)
0.006 (0.152)

100 (444)
100 (444)
150 (667) 150 (667) 200 (890)
300 (1335)
400 (1780)
600 (2670)

Max. Applied Force
(36" Lever, 6" Pivot)
lbf (N)
20 (89)
20 (89)
30 (133)
30 (133)
40 (178)
60 (267)
80 (356)
120 (534)

5 ­ 14

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
Gaterotor Bearing Inspection
1. Position a one gallon (at least) plastic oil collection bin beneath the side cover. Carefully pry open the side cover to allow the oil to drain before finally removing the side cover.
2. To measure the gaterotor radial bearing clearance, position a dial indicator to the gaterotor shaft as shown in Figure 5-10 (a) and zero the indicator. Put a hand as shown and firmly move the shaft in the direction shown in Figure 5-10 (a). Record the measurement. See table 5-4 for the maximum radial clearance value.
3. To measure the gaterotor axial bearing clearance, position a dial indicator on the gaterotor, as shown in Figure 5-10 (b).

4. To check axial bearing clearance use a lever arm pivoting on a bolt with a small block of wood against the gaterotor to protect it, as shown in Figure 5-10 (b). Record the measurement. See Table 5-4 for the maximum axial clearance value.

Table 5-4. Maximum Gaterotor Bearing Clearance

Compressor Models

Max. Axial Clearance in (mm)

Max. Radial Clearance in (mm)

All Sizes

0.002"

0.004"

(0.051 mm) (0.102 mm)

Figure 5-10 (a): Radial

Figure 5-10 (b): Axial
Side V iew
Showing gaterotor bearing clearance being measured. Wooden block to prevent damage to gaterotor blade.
Direction of gaterotor movement. Axial force at gaterotor to not exceed 100 lbs.

Rigidly at tach

Force to be determined

dial indicator.

by length of lever arm.

Use bolt for fulcrum.

Figure 5-10. Gaterotor Bearing Clearance

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 15

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Gaterotor Inspection
A) Gaterotor - Main Housing Shelf Clearance
Follow these steps to check the clearance between the gaterotor and the shelf, which should be between 0.003" ­ 0.004", see Figure 5-11.
1. Place a 0.003" feeler gauge between the gaterotor teeth, as shown in Figure 5-12 (a) and (b).
NOTE Make sure the feeler gauge stays in the opening between
the two teeth until it is on top of the shelf.
2. Without moving the feeler gauge, slowly rotate the gaterotor so that the feeler gauge tip stays between the gaterotor and the shelf. See Figure 5-12 (c).
CAUTION
Do not over rotate. If the rotor catches the feeler gauge, a piece can break and fall into the rotor groove.
3. Gently pull the feeler gauge out in the direction shown in Figure 5-12 (d).

Check for 0.003-0.004" (0.076- 0.102 mm) clearance between gaterotor blade and shelf.
Figure 5-11. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance

(a) Feeler Gauge Placement (Side View)

(b) Feeler Gauge Placement
(Top View)

(c) Tip Of The Feeler Gauge Stays Between Gaterotor
And Shelf While Rotating

(d) Feeler Gauge Must Be Pulled
Out In This Direc-
tion

5 ­ 16

Figure 5-12. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance Measurement Steps
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

4. If it is easy to pull out the feeler gauge, then increase the feeler gauge thickness by 0.001" and repeat above steps 1-3. If it is slightly tight to pull it out, then the clearance corresponds to the feeler gauge thickness.
NOTE Replacement gaterotors are the same dimensionally as the gaterotors installed at the factory. Therefore, the same shims can be reused when replacement is needed to preserve the 0.003" ­ 0.004" clearance.

Clearance and Shims

Under 0.003" 0.003" ­ 0.004" Over 0.004"

Remove shims (103 in Figure 5-29, or 106 in Figure 5-23 or 5-25) to achieve 0.003" ­ 0.004

Perfect!

Add shims (103 in Figure 5-29, or 106 in Figure 5-23 or 5-25) to achieve 0.003"
­ 0.004"

B) Gaterotor Float Measurement
1. Before doing any measurements, first conduct a visual check to see if there is any noticeable clearance between the gaterotor and its bushing, see Figure 5-13. If there is noticeable clearance, please contact Vilter Service Department.
NOTE
The number of bushings on a gaterotor can be anywhere from one to three.
2. To measure the float between the gaterotor bushing and the support damper pin (see Figure 5-15), position a dial indicator at the tip of the support as shown in Figure 5-14. Hold the gaterotor in place, then gently move the support teeth back and forth with two fingers (and record measurement). Refer to Table 5-5 to find the maximum float value.
NOTICE
If clearance measurements are out of tolerance, contact Vilter Service Department for further
assistance.

Table 5-5. Gaterotor Float

Model

Float in. (mm)

VSM-97 - VSM127

0.045 (1.143)

VSM 71 - VSM 401

0.045 (1.143)

VSM 501 - 701

0.045 (1.143)

VSS/VSSH 291 - 601

0.045 (1.143)

VSS 751 - 901

0.055 (1.397)

VSS/VSH 791 - 1301 0.060 (1.524)

VSS 1501 - 2101

0.060 (1.524)

VSS 2401-3001

0.060 (1.524)

Figure 5-13. Visual Inspection Between Gaterotor and Bushing
Dial Indicator Gaterotor Blade

Gaterotor Support

Damper Pin and Bushing

Main Rotor

Figure 5-14. Gaterotor Float Dial Location

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 17

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Figure 5-15. Gaterotor Float

C) Gaterotor Backlash Inspection
Gaterotor Backlash is the clearance between the gaterotor teeth width and the main rotor groove.
Follow these steps to perform the gaterotor backlash inspection:
1. The Gaterotor should be aligned so that a tooth in the rotor is perpendicular to the Main Axis as shown in Figure 5-16. The tooth should be in the center axis of the housing.
2. A dial indicator with magnetic base can be used (Vilter part numbers 9994ARE or 9994ARJ for the dial indicator, and 9994ARD for the magnetic base). See Figure 5-17 for location.

Inside Tooth is Perpendicular to the Rotor
Figure 5-16. Alignment of Gaterotor

Gaterotor Support
Gaterotor Shelf

Location for Dial Indicator Magnetic Base

5 ­ 18

Figure 5-17. Location of Dial Indicator Magnetic Base
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
3. Place the Dial Indicator as square as possible on the Gaterotor tooth as shown on Figure 5-18.
Dial Indicator

Figure 5-18. Placement of Dial Indicator

4. To measure the backlash (see Figure 5-19), move the gaterotor with two fingers back and forth rapidly several times while reading the dial indicator to see what the displacement range is. This displacement range will be the total backlash.
Contact Vilter Service Department if the measurement is above the ranges shown on Table 5-6.

Table 5-6. Backlash Range

Compressor Model

Normal backlash

VSM-97 thru VSS/VSH-1301 0.008" to 0.012"

VSS-1501 thru VSS-3001 0.008" to 0.015"

Fingers Positioning to Move the Gaterotor Back and Forth

Displacement Range

Figure 5-19. Measuring Backlash
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 19

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Important Notes 1. Backlash cannot be checked if:
· The gaterotor is damaged in any way. · The clearance between the gaterotor and the
shelf is too tight. 2. Make sure you check the backlash, not the float:
· The backlash is the clearance between the gaterotor teeth width and the rotor groove.
· The float is the amount of play between the gaterotor bushing and the damper pins.
Additional Inspections
In addition, visually inspect the main rotor and gaterotors for signs of abnormal wear due to dirt or other contaminants. If some chipping is present on the edges of the gaterotor, this will not influence the compressor performance. If chipping is more than what´s shown on Figure 5-20, take pictures and contact Vilter Service Department.
Post Inspection
After all the inspections are complete, the gaterotor cover, suction tee, coupling center member and coupling guard can be reinstalled and the unit can be evacuated and leak checked before starting.

Gaterotor Assembly Replacement (All Compressors Except VSM 301-701 and VSM 97-127 Compressors)
Table 5-7 lists the gaterotor tool sets needed to remove and install gaterotor assemblies.

Table 5-7. Gaterotor Tool Kits

Model

Tool Set VPN

VSM 97- VSM 127 VSM 71-VSM 401
VSM 501-701 VSS/VSSH 291-601 VSS/VSH 751-1301
VSS 1551-2101 VSS 2401-3001

N/A N/A A25205B A25205B A25205C A25205E A25205F

Removal
1. Remove center member, see appropriate Drive Coupling Replacement procedure.
NOTE All parts must be kept with their appropriate side and not mixed when the compressor is reassembled.
2. Remove two upper bolts from side cover
3. Install guide studs in holes.
NOTE There will be some oil drainage when the cover is
removed.
4. Remove remaining bolts and side cover.
5. Turn main rotor so a driving edge of any one of the main rotor grooves is even with the back of the gaterotor support.
NOTE The gaterotor stabilizer is designed to hold the gaterotor support in place and prevent damage to the gaterotor blade as the thrust bearings and
housing is being removed.
6. Insert gaterotor stabilizer. The side rails are not required on VSS 451 thru 601. For the VSS 751 thru 901 and VSS 1051 thru 1301 compressors, use the side rails and assemble to the gaterotor stabilizer as

Figure 5-20. Chipped Edge of Gaterotor

5 ­ 20

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

stamped. For the VSS 1551 thru 2101, use the side rails and assemble to the gaterotor stabilizer. Refer to Figure 5-21.
7. Remove hex head bolts and socket head bolts from thrust bearing cover.
8. Re-install two bolts into the threaded jacking holes to assist in removing thrust bearing cover. Retain the shim pack.
9. Hold gaterotor support with a suitable wrench on the flats provided near the roller bearing housing.
10. Remove the inner retainer bolts and retainer.
11. To remove the thrust bearing housing, install thrust bearing removal and installation tool with smaller puller shoe. Turn the jacking screw clockwise. The thrust bearings and housing assembly will be pulled off the shaft and out of the frame.
12. Remove bolts from roller bearing housing.
13. Re-install two bolts into jack bolt holes provided in housing to aid in removal.
14. To remove the gaterotor support, carefully move support in the opposite direction of rotation and tilt roller bearing end towards the suction end of the compressor. The compressor input shaft may have to be turned to facilitate the removal of the gaterotor support. On dual gate compressor units, repeat the procedure for the remaining gaterotor support assembly.

For VSS 451-601 compressors, do not use side rails.

90 1A

For VSS 751/901 and 10511301 compressors, use side rails and assemble gaterotor stabilizer as stamped.

90 1B 90 1C

Installation
15. Install gaterotor support by carefully tilting the roller bearing end of the gaterotor support towards the suction end of the compressor. The compressor input shaft may have to be rotated to facilitate the installation of the gaterotor support. Install gaterotor stabilizer. The gaterotor stabilizer (901) will hold the gaterotor support in place as the thrust bearing housing is being installed. If the gaterotor support is not restricted from moving, the gaterotor blade may be damaged. See Figure 5-22.
16. Install the roller bearing housing (112) with a new O-ring (141). See Figure 5-23.
17. Tighten bolts (152), see Appendix A.
18. When installing the thrust bearing housing (113), a new O-ring (142) must be used when the housing is installed, see Figure 5-23. Lubricate the outside of the housing and bearings with clean compressor oil to aid in the installation. Due to the fit of the bearings on the gaterotor shaft, the thrust bearing removal and installation tool with the pusher shoe must be used. Turn the jacking screw clockwise.

Position leading edge of main rotor groove flush with or slightly below back of gaterotor support.
Figure 5-21. Gaterotor Assembly Removal and Tools

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 21

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
This will push the thrust bearings onto the shaft and push the housing assembly into the frame. Install the inner retainer (115) and bolts (151) using Loctite® 242 thread locker. Tighten bolts, see Appendix A.
19. Set clearance between gaterotor blade and shelf. 20. Place a piece of 0.003"-0.004" shim stock between
gaterotor blade and shelf.
NOTE This measurement determines the amount of shims
needed for the correct clearance.
21. Measure depth from top of compressor case to top of thrust bearing housing.
22. Use factory installed shim pack (106) and bearing housing cover (116) without the O-ring (143).
NOTE Replacement blades are precisely the same dimensionally as blades installed originally at factory: Therefore, the same amount of shims will
be required for replacement blades.

Use flats provided on gaterotor support to prevent rotation when removing bearing retainer.

Figure 5-22. Gaterotor Assembly Removal

5 ­ 22

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

23. Check the clearance between the entire gaterotor blade and the shelf, rotate the gaterotor to find the tightest spot. It should be between 0.003-0.004" (0.076-0.102 mm). Make adjustments, if necessary. It is preferable to shim the gaterotor blade looser rather than tighter against the shelf, see Figure 5-24.
24. After clearance has been set install a new O-ring (143) on bearing housing cover, install cover and tighten the bolts to the recommended torque value.
25. Install side cover with a new gasket. Tighten the bolts to the recommended torque value. The unit can then be evacuated and leak checked.
Check for 0.003-0.004" (0.076- 0.102 mm) clearance between gaterotor blade and partition.

Figure 5-23. Gaterotor Assembly and Tools Figure 5-24. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 23

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Gaterotor Assembly Replacement (VSM 301-701 Compressors ONLY)
Removal
The removal of the gaterotor assembly for the VSM 301-701 compressors is similar for the VSS 751-3001 compressors except that the inner races are secured to the stationary bearing spindle.
1. Remove center member, see appropriate Drive Coupling Replacement procedure.
2. Remove the upper bolt from the side cover and install a guide stud in the hole.
3. Remove remaining bolts and side cover. There will be some oil drainage when the cover is removed.
4. The side cover that contains the suction strainer should have the suction line properly supported before the bolts securing the line to the cover can be removed. After the line is removed, the cover can be removed as described above.
5. Turn the main rotor so the driving edge of the groove is between the top of the shelf or slightly below the back of the gaterotor support. At this point install the gaterotor stabilizing tool.
6. Remove plug on the thrust bearing housing. Loosen the socket head cap screw that is located underneath the plug. This secures the inner races of the thrust bearings to the spindle.
7. Remove bolts that hold the thrust bearing housing to the compressor. Insert two of the bolts into the threaded jacking holes to assist in removing the bearing housing from the compressor. When the housing is removed, there will be shims between the spindle and thrust bearings. These control the clearance between the shelf and gaterotor blades. These must be kept with their respective parts for that side of the compressor.
8. Remove the bolts from the roller bearing housing. After the bolts have been removed, the housing can be removed from the compressor.
9. To remove the gaterotor support, carefully move the support opposite the direction of rotation and tilt the roller bearing end towards the suction end of the compressor. The compressor input shaft may have to be turned to facilitate the removal of the gaterotor support. On dual gate versions, repeat the procedure for the remaining gaterotor support assembly.

Installation
10. Install the gaterotor support. Carefully tilt the roller bearing end of the gaterotor support towards the suction end of the compressor. The compressor input shaft may have to be rotated to facilitate the installation of the gaterotor support.
11. Install the roller bearing housing with a new O-ring. Tighten the bolts to the recommended torque value.
12. Install the spindle with shims and O-ring, tighten bolts, see Appendix A. Measure the clearance between the shelf and blade.

Figure 5-25. Gaterotor Assembly Breakdown

5 ­ 24

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

13. Check the clearance between the entire gaterotor blade and the shelf, rotate the gaterotor to find the tightest spot. It should be between 0.003-0.004" (0.076-0.102 mm). Make adjustments, if necessary. It is preferable to shim the gaterotor blade looser rather than tighter against the shelf.
14. Once the clearance is set remove the spindle. Install new O-ring, apply Loctite 242 thread locker to the socket head cap screw clamping the thrust bearings to the spindle. Torque all bolts, see Appendix A.
15. Install side covers with new gaskets. Tighten bolts, see Appendix A. The unit can now be evacuated and leak checked.

Check for 0.003-0.004" (0.076- 0.102 mm) clearance between gaterotor blade and partition.
Figure 5-27. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance

Figure 5-26. Gaterotor Thrust Bearing

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 25

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Gaterotor Assembly Replacement (VSM 97-127 Compressors ONLY)
Removal
1. Remove center member. NOTE
All parts must be kept with their appropriate side and not mixed when the compressor is reassembled. 2. Remove bolts from side cover.
NOTE There will be some oil drainage when the cover is
removed. 3. Turn main rotor so a driving edge of any one of the
main rotor grooves is even with the back of the gaterotor support. 4. Remove the three screws (item 107 in Figure 5-29) that hold the housing in place. 5. Remove the gaterotor roller bearing housing (item 105 in Figure 5-29). 6. Remove O-ring (102-2), bearing and retainer ring (106). 7. Remove the 8 screws (107) that hold the ball bearing support (104) and the O-Ring (102-1).
Figure 5-28. Gaterotor Assembly Removal

8. To remove the gaterotor support (101), carefully move support in the opposite direction of rotation and tilt the roller bearing end towards the suction end of the compressor. The compressor input shaft may have to be turned to facilitate the removal of the gaterotor support.
9. On dual gate compressor units, repeat the procedure for the remaining gaterotor support assembly.
Installation
1. Install gaterotor support by carefully tilting the roller bearing end of the gaterotor support towards the suction end of the compressor. The compressor input shaft may have to be rotated to facilitate the installation of the gaterotor support. Install gaterotor stabilizer. The gaterotor stabilizer (901) will hold the gaterotor support in place as the thrust bearing housing is being installed. If the gaterotor support is not restricted from moving, the gaterotor blade may be damaged.
2. Install the roller bearing housing (105) with a new O-ring (102-2), and make sure the O-Ring is installed in the proper groove.
3. Tighten bolts (107), see Appendix A.
4. Install thrust bearing support. Lubricate the outside of the support and bearings with clean compressor oil to aid in the installation. Tighten bolts, see appendix A.
5. Measure clearance between gaterotor blade and shelf by placing shim stock between gaterotor blade and shelf until snug. Subtract .003"-.004" from total amount of shim stock used.
NOTE This measurement determines the amount of shims
needed for the correct clearance.
6. Use factory installed shim pack (103) and bearing housing cover without the O-ring.
NOTE Replacement blades are precisely the same dimensionally as blades installed originally at factory: Therefore, the same amount of shims will
be required for replacement blades.
7. Check the clearance between the entire gaterotor

5 ­ 26

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
Figure 5-29. Gaterotor Assembly (VSM 97-127 Compressors ONLY)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 27

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
blade and the shelf, rotate the gaterotor to find the tightest spot. It should be between 0.0030.004" (0.076-0.102 mm). Make adjustments, if necessary. It is preferable to shim the gaterotor blade looser rather than tighter against the shelf, see Figure 5-30. 8. After clearance has been set install a new O-ring on bearing housing cover, install cover and tighten the bolts to the recommended torque value. 9. Install side cover with a new gasket. Tighten the bolts to the recommended torque value. The unit can then be evacuated and leak checked.
Check for 0.003-0.004" (0.076- 0.102 mm) clearance between gaterotor blade and partition.

Gaterotor Disassembly (All Compressors Except VSM 97-127 Compressors)
10. To perform gaterotor disassembly, remove gaterotor from compressor, see Gaterotor Assembly Replacement procedure (All VSS-VSM Compressors Except VSM 301-701 Compressors) or Gaterotor Assembly procedure (VSM 301-701 Compressors ONLY).
Gaterotor Blade Removal
11. Remove the snap ring and washer from the gaterotor assembly. Lift gaterotor blade assembly off the gaterotor support, see Figure 5-31.
12. Check damper pin and bushing for excessive wear. Replace if required.

Figure 5-30. Gaterotor and Shelf Clearance

Figure 5-31. Gaterotor Blade Assembly

5 ­ 28

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Gaterotor Blade Installation
13. Install damper pin bushing (120) in gaterotor blade (111) from the back side of the blade. Be sure bushing is fully seated using red Loctite (271).
14. Place blade assembly on gaterotor support. Locating damper over pin.
15. Install washer (119) and snap ring (130) on gaterotor assembly. The bevel on the snap ring must face away from the gaterotor blade. After the gaterotor blade and support are assembled, there should be a small amount of rotational movement between the gaterotor and support.

Gaterotor Thrust Bearing Installation
For installation of thrust bearings on VSS units
22. Install thrust bearings (126) in the housing so the bearings are face to face. The larger sides of the inner races are placed together. A light application of clean compressor lubricating oil should be used to ease the installation of the bearings into the housing.
23. Center the bearing retainer ring on housing, use Loctite® 242-thread locker and evenly tighten the bolts to the recommended torque value, see Figure 5-34.

Gaterotor Thrust Bearing Removal
For removal of thrust bearings on VSM units: 16. Remove bolts (150) from the clamping ring (114),
see Figure 5-33. 17. Remove thrust bearing clamping ring. 18. Remove thrust bearings (126) from housing (113).

For removal of thrust bearings on VSS units: 19. Remove retaining ring from gaterotor support. 20. Remove bearings from support. 21. Remove bearing retainer from inner race.

Figure 5-33. Gaterotor Thrust Bearing

Figure 5-32. Gaterotor Blade Installation

Figure 5-34. Thrust Bearing Installation

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 29

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
For installation of thrust bearings on VSM 301701 units
24. Install retainer in the back of the inner race of one of the thrust bearings. The back of the inner race is the narrower of the two sides.
25. The bearing with the retainer should be placed in the housing first, retainer towards the support. Install the second bearing. The bearings should be positioned face to face. This means that the larger sides of the inner races are placed together. A light application of clean compressor lubricating oil should be used to ease the installation of the bearings into the gaterotor support.
26. Install the bearing retaining snap ring.
Gaterotor Roller Bearing Removal
27. Remove the snap ring (131), which retains the roller bearing in the bearing housing, see Figure 5-35.
28. Remove the roller bearing (125) from the bearing housing (112).
29. Use a bearing puller to remove the roller bearing race (125) from the gaterotor support (110).
Gaterotor Roller Bearing Installation
30. Match up the part numbers on the inner race to the part numbers outer race. Press the bearing race (numbers visible) onto the gaterotor support.
31. Install the outer bearing into the bearing housing so the numbers match the numbers on the inner race. Install the snap ring retainer in the housing. The bevel on the snap ring must face away from the roller bearing.

Figure 5-35. Roller Bearing Assembly

5 ­ 30

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Gaterotor Disassembly (VSM 97-127 Compressors ONLY)
1. To perform gaterotor disassembly, remove gaterotor from compressor.
Gaterotor Blade Removal
2. Lift gaterotor blade assembly off the gaterotor support, see Figure 5-36.
3. Check damper pin and bushing for excessive wear. Replace if required.

Gaterotor Blade Installation
4. Install damper pin bushing (120) in gaterotor blade (111) from the back side of the blade. Be sure bushing is fully seated using red Loctite (271), see Figure 5-37.
5. Place blade assembly on gaterotor support. Locating damper over pin, see Figure 5-36.
6. After the gaterotor blade and support are assembled, there should be a small amount of rotational
movement between the gaterotor and support.

GATEROTOR DAMPER
102
102
SUPPORT PIN
Figure 5-36. Gaterotor Support (VSM 97-127)

Figure 5-37. Gaterotor Blade Installation
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 31

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Gaterotor Thrust Bearing Removal
(See Figure 5-38)
7. Remove retaining ring from gaterotor support. 8. Remove bearings from support. 9. Remove bearing retainer from inner race.

Gaterotor Roller Bearing Removal
11. Remove the snap ring, which retains the roller bearing in the bearing housing.
12. Remove the roller bearing from the bearing housing.
13. Use a bearing puller to remove the roller bearing race from the gaterotor support.

Gaterotor Thrust Bearing Installation
10. Install thrust bearings in the housing so the bearing is face out (face is visible when installed). A light application of clean compressor lubricating oil should be used to ease the installation of the bearings into the housing, see Figure 5-38.

Gaterotor Roller Bearing Installation
14. Match up the part numbers on the inner race to the part numbers outer race. Press the bearing race (numbers visible) onto the gaterotor support.
15. Install the outer bearing into the bearing housing so the numbers match the numbers on the inner race. Install the snap ring retainer in the housing. The bevel on the snap ring must face away from the roller bearing.

101

Install Retainer Ring

104

With Beveled Facing

Away From Gaterotor

103

Figure 5-38. Gaterotor Thrust Bearing (VSM 97-127)

5 ­ 32

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Compressor Shaft Seal Replacement
Shaft Seal Assembly
The shaft seal is made up of a mating ring and a carbon or silicon carbide (SC) component.
The mating ring is the rotating part of the seal and is installed against the shaft shoulder. It has a drive notch on one end which aligns with the drive pin inserted in the shaft.

Carbon or SC component is the stationary part of the seal and is installed into the shaft seal housing using an O-ring.
The shaft seal housing with the stationary part is assembled in the compressor main housing using an O-ring, see Figure 5-39.
The shaft seal needs to be carefully handled and installed to function properly. Please see Figure 5-40 for details.

Figure 5-39. Shaft Seal Assembly

Handling Seal Face with Care
· Avoid touching seal faces as much as possible during installation.
· Be sure to always keep seal faces face-up, rather than face-down, see image on the right.

Figure 5-40. Handling Seal Face with Care
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 33

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Compressor Shaft Seal Replacement - For VSS/VSM Units Tools
Table 5-8. Shaft Seal Tool Kits

Model
VSM 97 - VSM 127 VSM 152 - VSM 401
VSM 501-701 VSS 291-601 VSS 751-1301 VSS 1551-2101

(VPN) for the Shaft Seal Tool Kits
N/A 25455A 25455B 25455B 25455C 25455D

Removal 1. Remove bolts (281) securing shaft seal housing
(218). to compressor.
NOTE There will be a small amount of oil drainage as the
shaft seal housing is removed.
2. Insert two of bolts (281) into threaded jacking holes to assist in removing shaft seal housing (218).
3. Remove mating ring (219C) from compressor shaft.
4. Remove oil seal (230) from shaft seal housing (218).
5. Using a brass drift and hammer, tap out cup assembly (219B) from the back side of shaft seal housing (218).
6. Remove O-ring (260).

Suggestion A spray bottle filled with clean compressor oil may be used to lubricate the faces of the seals without touching the seal.
7. Install a new oil seal (230) in seal housing (218).
8. Clean inside shaft seal housing (218) where cup assembly (219B) meets inside shaft seal housing.
9. If applicable, remove protective plastic from cup assembly (219B). DO NOT wipe or touch carbon component of cup assembly.
10. If carbon component of cup assembly (219B) needs cleaning, use alcohol and a lint-free cloth to clean.
11. Apply clean compressor lubricating oil to O-ring on cup assembly (219B).
12. Using shaft seal tool or similar, install cup assembly (219B) in shaft seal housing (218). If applicable, align the hole on the back of the carbon cartridge with the Anti-rotation pin in the seal housing. See Figure 5-42.
13. Clean compressor shaft and shaft seal cavity in compressor housing.
14. Apply clean compressor lubricating oil to mating ring (219C) seating area on compressor shaft. See Figure 5-42.
15. Apply clean compressor lubricating oil to inside area of mating ring (219C).
IMPORTANT
DO NOT wipe or touch the face of the mating ring (219C) where face meets the carbon component of
the cup assembly (219B).

Installation
CAUTION
Care must be taken when handling the cup assembly and mating ring when installing. See Figure 5-40 for handling seal faces with care. Do not touch the carbon component of the cup assembly or mirror face on the mating ring as body oil and sweat will cause
corrosion.

281

218

260

219

219B 219C

NOTE On VSS 291 - 601 compressors equipped with an Anti-rotation pin in the shaft seal housing, when replacing the cup assembly (219B) the Anti-rotation pin in the housing must be removed. See Figure
5-42.

Mirror Face

230

Carbon Component

Figure 5-41. Compressor Shaft Seal Assembly

5 ­ 34

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

CAUTION
Ensure the mating ring (219C) is fully seated against the shoulder of the compressor shaft. If the mating ring is not fully seated against the shoulder, the carbon component of the cup assembly (219B) will be damaged when the shaft seal housing (218) is
installed. See Figure 5-40.
16. Align slot in mating ring (219C) with drive pin on compressor shaft. Carefully push mating ring on while holding onto outside area of mating ring until mating ring is fully seated against shoulder on compressor shaft. See Figure 5-42.

17. Install a new O-ring (260) on the seal housing (218), making sure the O-ring is placed in the O-ring groove and not the oil gallery groove. See Figure 5-42.
18. Lubricate both seal faces with clean compressor lubricating oil.
19. Carefully install the seal housing (218) on the compressor shaft, evenly tightening the bolts (281) to the recommended torque values (36 ft-lbs).
20. Install the coupling and coupling guard. The unit can then be evacuated and leak checked.

218
Remove Anti-rotation Pin (If Installed)

218
Remove Anti-rotation Pin (if installed)

O-ring (260)

219C

O-ring

O-ring (260)

219C

O-ring

Align slot in mating ring (219C) with drive pin on compressor shaft.

Align slot in mating ring (219C) with drive pin on compressor shaft
Shoulder on Compressor Shaft

Shoulder on Compressor Shaft
Figure 5-42. Compressor Shaft Seal Installation: Tapered and Straight Shafts

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 35

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
Compressor Shaft Seal Replacement - For VSH/VSSH Units
Shaft Seal Removal - For Part# 25985Y and 25985YA (see Table 5-9 and Figure 5-43)
WARNING
Follow local lock-out/tag-out procedure. Compressors must be depressurized before attempting to do any work on them. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury, death and/or damage to equipment.
NOTE There will be a small amount of oil drainage as the
shaft seal housing is removed.
1. Remove bolts (281) securing shaft seal housing (218) to compressor.
2. Insert two bolts (281) into threaded jacking holes to assist in removing shaft seal housing (218).
3. Remove silicon carbide rotating face (219.6) & O-ring (219.7) from shaft.
4. Remove spring holder (219.8) from shaft.
5. Remove oil seal (230) from shaft seal housing (218).
6. Remove retaining ring (219.5) from seal housing.
7. Flip the seal housing over and carefully tap the stationary silicon carbide piece (219.3), retainer (219.4), and O-ring (219.2) out of the seal housing using brass drift and hammer.
8. Remove O-ring (260).

NOTE
VSH/VSSH compressors are designed using the following shaft seals, see Table 5-9 for their VPN
and pressure ranges.

Table 5-9. VSH/VSSH Shaft Seals

Shaft Seal
25985Y 25985YA 25985W 25985WA

Pressure (PSI) O-Ring Material
Static Dynamic

1800 1800

1350 Fluoroelastomer

1350

EPDM

1800 1800

1350 Fluoroelastomer

1350

EPDM

5 ­ 36

Figure 5-43. Shaft Seal Breakdown (28985Y & 28985YA)
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Shaft Seal Removal ­ For Part# 28985W and 28985WA (see Table 5-9 and Figure 5-44)
WARNING
Follow local lock-out/tag-out procedure. Compressors must be depressurized before attempting to do any work on them. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury, death and/or damage to equipment.

6. Remove oil seal (230) from shaft seal housing (218).
7. Remove the O-ring (260) from the shaft seal housing (218).
8. The rotating assembly (219C) can be firmly pulled off the compressor shaft as one assembly. Be sure to note the location of the drive pin in the main compressor shaft for re-assembly. See Figure 5-42.

NOTE There will be a small amount of oil drainage as the
shaft seal housing is removed.
1. Prepare compressor for disassembly (standard nomenclature from other area of manual.
2. Loosen and remove screws (281) mounting shaft seal housing (218) to main compressor housing.
3. Carefully thread three screws (281) into the jacking holes in the shaft seal housing (218) to push it out of the main compressor housing. Do not go more than one-half turn on any screw at a time.
4. Once the shaft seal housing (218) has been removed from the compressor housing, loosen the 4 small socket cap screws (303) holding the shaft seal retainer (304) to the shaft seal housing (218).
5. Using a hammer and punch, carefully tap the seal cartridge (305) out of the shaft seal housing (218).

281

218

219B

219C

306 305 304 303 260 301A 301B 301C

Shaft

230

Stationary

Rotating

Face

Face

Figure 5-44. Shaft Seal Breakdown (28985W and 28985WA Only)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 37

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Prior to Shaft Seal Installation
WARNING
Follow local lock-out/tag-out procedure. Compressors must be depressurized before attempting to do any work on them. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury, death and/or damage to equipment.
NOTE Care must be taken when handling the cup assembly and mating ring when installing. See Figure 5-40 for
Handling Seal Face with Care.
Suggestion
A spray bottle filled with clean compressor oil may be used to lubricate the faces of the seals without touching the seal.
Follow these steps to verify the integrity of a shaft seal: 1. Check lead chamfer and outer diameter of shaft for
deep scratches that may potentially damage the O-ring on the inner diameter of the shaft seal, see Figure 5-45:

Notch in shaft seal for alignment with drive pin on
the shaft

Anti-rotation pin

Shaft Seal See Table 5-9

Lead chamfer on

inner diameter of

housing

Back wall of housing to

which shaft seal/shim

will bottom on

Figure 5-46. Shaft Seal Housing

219C

O-ring

Drive Pin on Shaft

Lead Chamfer on Outer Diameter of Shaft

Shoulder to Which Seal Will Bottom on
Figure 5-45. Shaft with Pin

Align slot in mating ring (219C) with drive
pin on compressor shaft
Shoulder on Compressor Shaft
Figure 5-47. The Alignment of Compressor Shaft and Mating Ring

2. Check lead chamfer and inner diameter of shaft seal housing for burrs and/or deep scratches that may potentially damage the O-ring on the outer diameter of the shaft seal, see Figure 5-46.
3. Clean compressor shaft and shaft seal cavity in compressor housing.
4. Apply clean compressor lubricating oil to the compressor shaft in mating ring seating area, see Figure 5-47.

5 ­ 38

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Shaft Seal Installation - For Part# 25985Y and 25985YA (see Table 5-9 and Figure 5-43)
NOTE Follow the "Prior to Shaft Seal Installation" steps
before starting this procedure.
WARNING
Follow local lock-out/tag-out procedure. Compressors must be depressurized before attempting to do any work on them. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury, death and/or damage to equipment.
NOTE Care must be taken when handling the cup assembly and mating ring when installing. See Figure 5-40 for
Handling Seal Face with Care.
Suggestion
A spray bottle filled with clean compressor oil may be used to lubricate the faces of the seals without touching the seal.
CAUTION
Do not wipe or touch the face of the mating ring (219C) where the face meets the carbon component
of the stationary assembly (219B).
1. Apply clean compressor lubricating oil to inside area of spring holder (219.8), rotating Silicon carbide piece (219.6) and o-ring (219.7).
2. Carefully fit spring holder (219.8) onto shaft until it is fully seated against shoulder on compressor shaft. Be sure to align slot in spring holder (219.8) with drive pin on compressor shaft, see Figure 5-47.

CAUTION
Ensure the spring holder (219.8) is fully seated against the shoulder of the compressor shaft. If the spring holder (219.8) is not fully seated against the shoulder, the carbon component of the stationary assembly (219B) will be damaged when the shaft seal housing
(218) is installed. 3. Place O-ring (219.7) inside rotating silicon carbide
piece (219.6) and carefully assemble onto shaft. You should feel some resistance in sliding this onto the shaft shoulder.
4. Install a new oil seal (230) in seal housing (218).
5. If necessary, Install anti-rotation pin (219.1a) in hole in shaft seal housing (218).
6. Install O-ring (219.2) into shaft seal housing.
7. Install stationary silicon carbide piece (219.3) in shaft seal housing with anti-rotation pin (219.1b) aligned 180 degrees away from the pin (219.1a) in step 4. You should feel some resistance to fit the stationary piece into the O-ring.
8. Fit the retainer (219.4) over the stationary piece while aligning the slots on the anti-rotation pins.
9. Install retaining ring (219.5) into groove in shaft seal housing.
10. Install a new O-ring (260) on the seal housing (218), making sure the O-ring is placed in the O-ring groove and not the oil gallery groove. Lubricate both seal faces with clean compressor lubricating oil.
11. Carefully install the seal housing (218) on the compressor shaft, evenly tightening the bolts (281) to the recommended torque values (36 ft-lbs).
12. Install the coupling and coupling guard. The unit can then be evacuated and leak checked.

Figure 5-43. Shaft Seal Breakdown (28985Y & 28985YA)
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 39

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Shaft Seal Installation ­ For Part# 28985W and 28985WA (see Table 5-9 and Figure 5-44)
NOTE Follow the "Prior to Shaft Seal Installation" steps
before starting this procedure.
WARNING
Follow local lock-out/tag-out procedure. Compressors must be depressurized before attempting to do any work on them. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury, death and/or damage to equipment.
NOTE Care must be taken when handling the cup assembly and mating ring when installing. See Figure 5-40 for
Handling Seal Face with Care.
Suggestion A spray bottle filled with clean compressor oil may be used to lubricate the faces of the seals without touching the seal.
CAUTION
Do not wipe or touch the face of the mating ring (219C) where the face meets the carbon component
of the stationary assembly (219B).
1. Install a new oil seal (230) in seal housing (218).
2. Ensure compressor shaft is clean and free from marks and scratches.
3. Remove seal rotating face (301A) and O-ring (301B) from rotating assembly portion of the seal (assembly 219C).
4. Apply clean compressor lubricating oil to seal
219B

seating area on the compressor shaft and inside area of rotating face support (301C).
5. Gently assemble the rotating face support (301C) onto main compressor shaft, taking care to align the drive pin in the main shaft with the keyway on the rotating face support (301C).
6. Using a small amount of Flowserve supplied grease, carefully re-assemble O-ring (301B) and rotating face (301A) over the compressor shaft, onto the rotating face support (301C).
7. Moving onto the stationary portion of the seal (219B), gently press the stationary face (305), into the seal housing (218) ensuring it is fully seated. Make sure to align the hole on the back of the stationary face (305) with the Anti-rotation pin (306) in the seal housing (218). See Figure 5-46.
8. Assemble retaining ring (304) over the seal into the shaft seal housing (218), aligning the mounting holes with the threaded holes in the shaft seal housing.
9. Apply blue Loctite 242 to the bolts (303) and tighten them down evenly in a star pattern until snug, then torqueing each to 48 in-lbs (6 N-m).
10. Apply clean compressor lubricating oil to both seal faces (305 and 219C).
11. Ensure a new O-ring (260) is installed in proper groove of shaft seal housing (218).
12. Carefully assemble shaft seal housing (218) onto main compressor shaft into main compressor housing, evenly tightening the bolts (281) and torqueing to their appropriate value as specified by compressor specific drawing.
13. Install the coupling and coupling guard. The unit can then be evacuated and leak checked.
219C

281

218

306 305 304 303 260 301A 301B 301C

Shaft

230
5 ­ 40

Stationary Face

Rotating Face

Figure 5-44. Shaft Seal Breakdown (28985W and 28985WA Only)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Slide Valve Actuator Assembly Replacement
To replace slide valve actuator assembly, proceed with the following steps:
Removal
WARNING
At shutdown, open any other valves that may trap liquids to prevent serious injury and/or damage to
equipment.
WARNING
Follow local lock-out/tag-out procedure. Compressors must be depressurized before attempting to do any work on them. Failure to comply may result in serious
injury, death and/or damage to equipment.
NOTE This procedure is applicable to both capacity and
volume slide valve actuator assemblies.
1. Shut down the compressor unit, refer to Stopping/ Restarting procedure in Section 4.
2. Turn disconnect switches to the OFF position for the compressor unit and oil pump motor starter, if equipped.
3. Allow compressor, motor and surrounding components to cool prior to servicing.
4. Disconnect connectors from actuator.
NOTE Note orientation of components to aid in installation.
5. First remove E-clips, then remove Locking Retainers, next loosen and remove Grooved Bolts and Washes that securing actuator assembly to actuator mount. See Figure 5-48 for parts details.
6. Remove actuator assembly from actuator mount.

Installation
CAUTION
When installing the slide valve actuator assembly, loosen locking collar down the shaft. Do not use a
screwdriver to pry locking collar into position.
7. Position actuator assembly on mount as noted in removal.
8. Install washers and grooved bolts to secure actuator assembly to actuator mount, torque them to 6 lb-ft. Then install locking retainers. Last push E-clips into grooved bolt heads. Refer to Actuator Installation Using Anti-Rotation Bolts (see next page) for details.
9. Tighten screws, see Appendix A.
CAUTION
If installing new actuator, do not connect connectors of power cable or position transmitter cable to new actuator once installed. Connecting connectors to new actuator will occur during calibration procedure. Failure to comply may result in damage to equipment.
10. Leave connectors disconnected to actuator assembly.
11. Calibrate actuator assembly, see Slide Valve Calibration procedure in Section 4 or Appendix F.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 41

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Actuator Installation Using Anti-Rotation Bolts
Tools Needed: A 7/16" open wrench or torque wrench with 7/16" crowfoot wrench adapter.
Part #: The parts come with the actuator. Retrofit kit # is 25972R (Includes 4 sets of bolts, washers, retainers & E-clips).
1. Install the Grooved Bolt and Washer and torque them to 6 lb-ft. See figure 5-48 (a).

NOTE It may be necessary to adjust the bolt position so that one of the bolt edges is parallel to line A and B, then the retainer will drop-on easily. If required,
tighten bolt further for this alignment.

A

B

E-clip

2. Position Locking Retainer over Grooved Bolt, with the shallow curved edge toward the center of the command shaft housing. See figure 5-48 (b). NOTE
The locking retainer hex hole is offset 3° so flipping it over gives it new positioning.
3. Push E-Clip into Grooved Bolt Head. Once E-clip is on make sure it rotates back and forth freely. This will ensure E-Clip is completely seated. See figure 5-48 (c).

GrooveLokTM Bolt

Retainer (Many Shapes
Available)

Assembled

Groove Bolt Washer

Locking Retainer

(a) Groove bolt and washer

(b) Locking Retainer

Complete Assembly

E- clip

5 ­ 42

(C) E-clip
Figure 5-48. Actuator Installation Using Anti-Rotation Bolts
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Slide Valve Command Shaft Assembly Replacement
Removal
NOTE The following steps can be used to remove or install either the capacity or volume command shaft
assemblies.
1. Shut down and isolate compressor unit, see Compressor Unit Shutdown and Isolation procedure.
2. Remove actuator, see Actuator Assembly Replacement procedure.
3. Remove four socket head cap screws (457) and Nord-Lock washers (477) securing the command shaft assembly to the discharge manifold.
4. The command shaft and mounting plate may now be removed from the compressor.

Installation
5. Install a new o-ring (446) into the groove on the compressor discharge manifold. You may use clean compressor lubricating oil on the o-ring.
6. Install the command shaft onto the compressor discharge manifold. Ensure that the command shaft tongue is engaged in the cross-shaft slot inside the compressor discharge manifold. Rotate the command shaft assembly so that the vent holes point downward. This will prevent water and dust from entering the vent.
7. Secure the command shaft assembly to the discharge manifold using the four socket head cap screws and Nord-Lock washers and apply the proper torque.
8. Perform leak check, see Compressor Unit Leak Check Procedure.

Command shaft assembly

457 477

Rotate bearing housing so vent hole points down

Align the tongue of the

446

command shaft with the

groove in the cross shaft

Figure 5-49. Command Shaft Assembly Replacement
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 43

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

Liquid Injection Control Valve Station (Danfoss ICF 20-40 Valve Station)
For liquid injection control operation, refer to Section 2. For additional information regarding setup, installation, programming and troubleshooting, refer to Appendices.
The liquid injection control valve station (ICF) consists of these parts (Danfoss part acronyms are shown in parentheses):

· Shut-off Valves (ICFS), Inlet and Outlet · Solenoid Valve (ICFE) with Manual Stem (ICFO) · Motorized Valve Assembly (ICM valve assembly with
ICAD motor actuator) · Strainer (ICFF) with Drain Valve
For parts and service kits, refer to Tables 5-10 and 5-11.

Shut-off Valve (ICFS)

Solenoid Valve (ICFE)

Motorized Valve Assembly (ICM/ICAD)

Inlet Connection
Liquid Injection Control Valve Station (ICF)

Sight Glass (Shown with Covers)

Strainer (ICFF)

Drain Valve

Solenoid Manual Stem
(ICFO)

Shut-off Valve (ICFS)

Figure 5-50. Danfoss ICF 20-40 Valve Station (Liquid Injection Control)

5 ­ 44

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service

VILTERTM PART NO 3389DA 3389DB 3389DC 3389DD 3389DD1

Table 5-10. Coils for Solenoid Valves (ICFE)

VOLTAGE

Hz HOLDING CONNECTION PILOT LIGHT

110-120VAC

60 14W

110-120VAC

60 14W

110VAC

60 12W

220VAC

60 12W

220VAC W/110VAC 60 12W LED BOX

DIN DIN TERMINAL BOX TERMINAL BOX -

GREEN GREEN GREEN LED

Table 5-11. Parts for Motorized Valve Station (ICF)

VILTERTM PART NO 3389EA 3389EE
3389AE1 3389AE2 3389EB 3389FD 3389FA 3389FC 3389FB 3389FE 3389FF

DESCRIPTION
ICAD 600 MOTOR ACTUATOR W/10M CABLES ICAD 900 MOTOR ACTUATOR W/10M CABLES
CABLES, 10M FOR ICAD ACTUATOR TOP COVER FOR ICAD ACTUATOR CONTROLLER EKC 347, LIQUID LEVEL MODULE B66 FUNCTION (FOR ICF VALVE STATION) MAGNETIC TOOL FOR ICM VALVE MANUAL OPERATION 20,25, AND 32 MAGNETIC TOOL FOR ICM VALVE MANUAL OPERATION 40, 50, AND 65 ICM 20 SERVICE KIT (VALVE SEAT) ICM 25 SERVICE KIT (VALVE SEAT) ICM 32 SERVICE KIT (VALVE SEAT)

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 45

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service
Main Rotor Assembly
Due to the procedures and tools involved in the disassembly and reassembly, the main rotor assembly must be performed by qualified individuals. Please consult the factory if maintenance is required.

Torque Specifications
Refer to the following table for torque specifications.

Table 5-12. Torque Specifications (ft-lbs)

TYPE BOLT

HEAD MARKINGS

NOMINAL SIZE NUMBERS OR INCHES #10 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8

SAE GRADE 2 COARSE (UNC)

5 10 18 29 44 63 87 155 150*

SAE GRADE 5 COARSE (UNC)

8 16 28 44 68 98 135 240 387

SAE GRADE 5 FINE (UNF)

16

SAE GRADE 8 COARSE (UNC)

11 22 39 63 96 138 191 338 546

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
(ASTM A574)
COARSE (UNC)

5 13 26 46 73 112 155 215 380 614

NOTES:

1) Torque values on this sheet are not to override those given on the individual drawings.
2) When using loctite, the torque value on this sheet are only accurate if bolts are tightened immediately after loctite is applied.
* The proof strength of Grade 2 bolts is less for sizes 7/8 and above and therefore the torque values are less than smaller sizes of the same grade.

5 ­ 46

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 5 · Maintenance/Service Using A Torque Wrench Correctly

Torque Wrenches
USING A TORQUE WRENCH CORRECTLY INVOLVES FOUR PRIMARY CONCERNS:

A. A smooth even pull to the break point is required. Jerking the wrench can cause the pivot point to break early leaving the bolt at a torque value lower than required. Not stopping when the break point is reached results in an over torque condition.

B. When more than one bolt holds two surfaces together there is normally a sequence that should be used to bring the surfaces together in an even manner. Generally bolting is tightened incrementally in a diametrically staggered pattern. Some maintenance manuals specify a tightening scheme. If so, the manual scheme shall be followed. Just starting on one side and tightening in a circle can cause the part to warp, crack, or leak.

C. In some cases threads are required to be lubricated prior to tightening the bolt/nut. Whether a lubricant is used
or not has considerable impact on the amount of torque required to achieve the proper preload in the bolt/stud. Use a lubricant, if required, or not if so specified.

D. Unlike a ratchet wrench a torque wrench is a calibrated instrument that requires care. Recalibration is required periodically to maintain accuracy. If you need to remove a bolt/nut do not use the torque wrench. The clockwise/counterclockwise switch is for tightening right hand or left hand threads not for loosening a fastener. Store the torque wrench in a location where it will not be bumped around.
Fine Serration Face Out

Nord-Lock® Washers
A. The Nord-Lock® lock washer sets are used in many areas in the single screw compressors that require a vibration proof lock washer.

Coarse Serration Mate Together

B. The lock washer set is assembled so the coarse serrations that resemble ramps are mated together.
C. Once the lock washer set is tightened down, it takes more force to loosen the bolt that it did to tighten it. This is caused by the washers riding up the opposing ramps.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

5 ­ 47

5 ­ 48 / Blank VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 6 · Troubleshooting

Table 6-1. Slide Valve Actuator Troubleshooting Guide (1 of 3)

Problem

Reason

Solution

Dirt or debris is blocking one or both optocoupler slots.

Clean the optocoupler slots with a cotton swab and rubbing alcohol.

The photo-chopper fence extends less than about half way
into the optocoupler slots.

Adjust the photo-chopper so that the fence extends further into the optocou-
pler slots. Make sure the motor brake operates freely and the photo-chopper will not contact the optocouplers when
the shaft is pressed down.

The white calibrate wire in the grey Turck cable is grounded.

Tape the end of the white wire in the panel and make sure that it cannot
touch metal.

The actuator cannot be calibrated.
Dirt and/or condensation on the position sensor boards are
causing it to malfunction.

Clean the boards with an electronics cleaner or compressed air.

The calibrate button is stuck down.
The position sensor has failed.

Try to free the stuck button. Replace the actuator.

Push button is being held down for more that ¾ second when going through the cali-
bration procedure.

Depress the button quickly and then let go. Each ¾ second the button is held down counts as another press.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

6 ­ 1

Section 6 · Troubleshooting

Table 6-1. Slide Valve Actuator Troubleshooting Guide (2 of 3)

Problem

Reason

Solution

The white calibrate wire in the grey Turck cable is grounding
intermittently.

Tape the end of the white wire in the panel and make sure that it
cannot touch metal.

The actuator goes into calibration mode spontaneously.

A very strong source of electromagnetic interference (EMI), such as a contactor, is in the vicinity of the actuator or
grey cable.

Increase the distance between the EMI source and the actuator. Install additional metal shielding material between the EMI source
and the actuator or cable.

There is an intermittent failure of the position sensor

Replace the actuator.

The actuator goes into calibration mode every time power is restored after a power loss

The motor brake is not working properly.
The position sensor's EEPROM memory has failed

Get the motor brake to where it operates freely and recalibrate.
Replace the actuator.

The actuator does not transmit the correct position after a power loss.

The motor was manually moved while the position sen-
sor was not powered.

Recalibrate.

The motor brake is not working properly.

Get the motor brake to where it operates freely and recalibrate.

The position sensor's EEPROM memory has failed

Replace the actuator.

There is a rapid clicking noise when the motor is operating.

The photo-chopper is misaligned with the slotted optocouplers.
The photo-chopper is positioned too low on the motor
shaft.
A motor bearing has failed

Try to realign or replace the actuator.
Adjust the photo-chopper so that the fence extends further
into the optocoupler slots.
Replace the actuator.

There is a loose connection in the screw terminal blocks.

Tighten

The motor operates in one direction only

There is a loose or dirty connection in the yellow Turck
cable.
The position sensor has failed.
There is a broken motor lead or winding

Clean an tighten
Replace the actuator. Replace the actuator.

6 ­ 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 6 · Troubleshooting

Table 6-1. Slide Valve Actuator Troubleshooting Guide (3 of 3)

Problem

Reason
The thermal switch has tripped because the motor is overheated

Solution
The motor will resume operation when it cools. This could be caused by a malfunctioning control panel. Consult the factory.

The motor will not move in either direction

Any of the reasons listed in "The motor operates in one direction only"
The command shaft is jammed.

See above. Free the command shaft.

Broken gears in the gear-motor.

Replace the actuator.

Blown relays or fuses.

Check and replace blown relays and/or fuse

The motor operates intermittently, several Motor is overheating and the

minutes on, several minutes off.

thermal switch is tripping.

The motor runs sporadically

Bad thermal switch.
Any of the reasons listed in "The motor operates in one direction only"

This could be caused by a malfunctioning control panel. Consult the factory.
Replace the actuator.
See above.

The motor runs but output shaft will not turn.

Stripped gears inside the gear rotor, or the armature has come unpressed from the armature shaft.

Replace the actuator.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

6 ­ 3

Section 6 · Troubleshooting
Slide Valve Actuators communicate problems discovered by internal diagnostics via LED blink codes. Only one blink code is displayed, even though it is possible that more than one problem has been detected.

Table 6-2. Slide Valve Actuator LED Blink Codes* (1 of 2)

Flash Pattern * = ON - = OFF
*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-
*---*---*---*---*---*---

Meaning
Calibration step 1. Calibration step 2.

*--*--------------------

This indicates a zero span. This error can only occur during calibration. The typical cause is forgetting to move the actuator when setting the
upper limit of the span. If this is the case, press the blue button to restart the calibration procedure. This error can also occur if either or both of the slotted optocouplers are not working. If this is the case, the
slide valve actuator will have to be replaced.
The operation of the slotted optocouplers can be tested as follows:
1. Manually rotate the motor shaft until the aluminum photo-chopper fence is not blocking either of the optocoupler slots.
2. Using a digital multimeter, measure the DC voltage between terminal 3 of the small terminal block and TP1 on the circuit board (see Note
1). The measurement should be between 0.1 and 0.2 Volts.
3. Next, measure the DC voltage between terminal 3 and TP2 on the circuit board. You should measure be- tween 0.1 and 0.2 Volts.

*-----------------------

This error means that the slide valve actuator is no longer transmitting accurate position information. The actuator should be recalibrated as soon as possible, after the cause of the over-speed is identified and cor-
rected. This error will not clear until the actuator is re-calibrated.
This code can be caused by: 1. The motor speed exceeding the position sensors ability to measure
it at some time during operation. A non-functioning motor brake is usually to blame.
2. The actuator is being operated where strong infrared light can falsely trigger the slotted optocouplers, such as direct sunlight. Shade the actuator when the cover is off for service and calibration. Do not
operate the actuator with the cover off.

6 ­ 4

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 6 · Troubleshooting

Table 6-2. Slide Valve Actuator LED Blink Codes (2 of 2)

Flash Pattern * = ON - = OFF

Meaning

*--*--*-----------------

The motor is overheated. The actuator motor will not run until it cools. Once the motor cools, the actuator will resume normal
operation.
Motor overheating is sometimes a problem in hot humid environments when process conditions demand that the slide valve actuators reposition often. Solutions are available; consult your VilterTM
authorized distributor for details.
Another possible cause for this error is a stuck motor thermal switch. The thermal switch can be tested by measuring the DC voltage with a digital multimeter be- tween the two TS1 wire pads (see Note 2). If
the switch is closed (normal operation) you will measure 0 Volts.

*********************

The 24V supply voltage is low. This will occur momentarily when the actuator is powered up and on power down.
If the problem persists, measure the voltage using a digital multimeter between terminals 3 and 4 of the small terminal block. If the voltage is less than 24V, the problem is in the supply to the board.
If the voltage is >= 24V, replace the actuator.

-******************** *****----*--------------

The EEPROM data is bad. This is usually caused by loss of 24V power before the calibration procedure was completed. The actuator will not move while this error code is being displayed. To clear the error, calibrate the actuator. If this error has occurred and the cause was not
loss of 24V power during calibration, possible causes are: 1. The EEPROM memory in the micro-controller is bad. 2. The large blue capacitor is bad or has a cracked lead.
Micro-controller program failure. Please notify your VilterTM authorized distributor.

*There are two versions of slide valve actuators, version A and B. Only version B is able to display LED blink codes. Slide valve actuator version B can be distinguished by only having a single circuit board as supposed to two circuit boards in version A.
Note 1: TP1 and TP2 are plated-thru holes located close to the slotted optocouplers on the board. They are clearly marked on the board silkscreen legend.
Note 2: The TS1 wire pads are where the motor thermal switch leads solder into the circuit board. They are clearly marked on the board silkscreen legend and are oriented at a 45 degree angle.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

6 ­ 5

Section 6 · Troubleshooting

Table 6-3. Troubleshooting Guide - General Problems & Solutions (1 of 3)

Problem

Solution

Low Oil Pressure at Start

· After failing to start compressor with "Prelube Oil Pump Inhibit", first allow Discharge pressure, Oil Filter In pressure and Out pressure to equalize. Then restart compressor. If compressor fails to start due to low oil pressure, continue troubleshooting with items below.
· Reset Prelube Oil Pressure Setpoint in Alarms and Trip Setpoints screen to lowest recommended setpoints.
· Check calibration of oil manifold transducer, discharge pressure transducer, and suction transducer.
· Check for correct oil pump motor rotation and operation.
· Ensure transducer isolation valves are open.
· Verify that the correct transducer ranges are selected.
· Check to see all oil line valves are open except the oil dump valve used to fill the lines and oil cooler.
· Check oil strainer for dirt. · Check oil filter pressure drop. · Check "Prelube Oil Pressure Safety Changeover" setpoint is sufficient in Timers Screen.
· Prelube Oil Pressure is Manifold Pressure minus Discharge Pressure.

Low Run Oil Pressure

· Check solutions in "Low Oil Pressure at Start".
· Check that there is proper discharge pressure ratio to create differential pressure, otherwise oil pressure can't be maintained. Oil pressure is manifold oil pressure minus the suction pressure. It is a net pressure.

Oil flow or oil pressure problems

· Clean oil strainer screen. · Change oil filter, maybe plugged or collapsed. · Oil pump gears worn internally, excessive end-clearance. · Oil priming valve used on air-cooled cooler units is open. · Relief in-line check valve stuck open. · Pressure ratio too low, oil pump should be on.

Faulty pressure or temperature readings

· Check that the correct pressure or temperature range is selected in the Instrument Calibration menu.
· Check cable connections at device, terminal strips, and PLC input card for correct wiring and shielding (RF noise).
· Check calibration of RTDs and transducers.

6 ­ 6

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 6 · Troubleshooting

Table 6-3. Troubleshooting Guide - General Problems & Solutions (2 of 3)

Problem

Solution

Oil Loss Issues

· Oil return line from coalescing side of oil separator to suction is closed, not open enough (3/4 turns should be sufficient), or plugged with debris · The check valve in the oil return line could be stuck closed or the flow is in the wrong direction
· There may be water in the oil affecting the coalescing elements
· Coalescent elements in need of replacement due to age or damage (water contamination)
· The operating conditions are not correct (too high of suction and/ or too low discharge pressure) This creates increased gas flow which could make the oil separator too small
· The suction or discharge check valve is not working correctly causing oil to escape when the unit stops
· Viscosity of oil incorrect; send sample for testing
· There is an oil leak somewhere in the system

High oil temperature (liquid injection)

· Check for correct setting of all manual values.
· Check for correct operation of 3-way oil mixing valve.
· If you are controlling a step type oil cooler or a VFD oil cooler, verify the correct one is selected in the Configuration Screen and the amount of steps are entered in the Remote Oil Cooler Control Screen.
· Check the oil cooler and associated piping to make sure it is full of oil before starting.
· Check the oil strainer for debris and clean if necessary.
· Verify that the volume slide actuator is functioning correctly and that the correct compressor size (type) is selected.
· Check that all fans are working.
· Check for correct fan rotation on the oil cooler.
· Check that your operating conditions are within the "As Sold" design conditions.

Capacity/Volume Slide Actuator Alarms/Trips/
Symptoms:

· Calibration method not correct · Actuator or Gear motor not working, or off on overload · Slide valve carriage assembly out of position, slides binding · Cross-shaft gears, broken pins · Command shaft broken · Slide valve rack or rack shaft damaged · Check balance piston movement · Reference Slide Valve Actuator Troubleshooting Guide · Check I/O fusing

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

6 ­ 7

Section 6 · Troubleshooting

Table 6-3. Troubleshooting Guide - General Problems & Solutions (3 of 3)

Problem

Solution

High Amp Draw

· Check calibration at full load. · Check CT ratio entered in Vission 20/20. · Check slide valve calibration, especially volume slide.

Vibration

· Check that unit is leveled and secured to mounting pad or floor. · Check supported pipes (i.e. suction and discharge pipe) and make sure they are adequately supported. · Check for loose bolts and nuts. · Check condition of compressor and motor (i.e. alignments)

Excessive Motor Backspin

· If there is more than normal motor backspin at shutdown, check suction check valve for proper operation.

6 ­ 8

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 7 · Warranty and Parts

Warranty Claim Processing
This section explains how the warranty claim is processed and to help clear any questions that may arise prior to contacting customer service. For additional warranty information, refer to the Terms and Conditions of your order. VilterTM contact information can be found on page iii.
1. The warranty process starts with contacting a Vilter Service and Warranty (S&W) department representative. Ensure to have the original Vilter sales order number for the equipment available to better assist you.
2. Our Vilter S&W representative will confirm if the equipment is within the warranty time frame as described in the warranty statement.
If the equipment (Part/Compressor/Compressor Motor) is within the warranty time frame, proceed to the following section regarding the type of equipment:
Process for returning Products covered by the warranty:
STEP 1. To return a defective Product or part under this warranty, you will need to provide the VilterTM compressor order number on all submitted documents.
For a parts warranty request, you will also need to provide:
· The VilterTM serial number of the compressor;
· A detailed and accurate description of the issue;
· A valid purchase order for the new part(s)-- you must pay the freight;
· One copy of Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) sent to you for your records;
· One copy of RMA sent to you to include in the return shipment of parts back to VilterTM for warranty consideration.

STEP 3. Upon receipt of the returned part(s), VilterTM will complete a timely evaluation of the part(s). STEP 4. You will be contacted with Vilter's decision once the final report is completed. STEP 5. If approved, the approved warranty will be credited (excluding freight) to your account. VilterTM will retain the returned part(s) for final disposition. If a warranty request is not approved, you will be provided with a written response and the parts will be held for 30 days. After such time, VilterTM will dispose of the parts. If you wish to have the part(s) returned, you will need to contact VilterTM and the part(s) will be returned freight collect.
Procedure for parts not manufactured by VilterTM: Although VilterTM does not provide any warranty for parts and products that are not manufactured by VilterTM, VilterTM does pass through any manufacturer's warranty to you (to the maximum extent permitted by the manufacturer). VilterTM will work with you in facilitating your warranty claim with the manufacturer. To facilitate your warranty claim, please follow the following four steps:
STEP 1. Determine if the part or product is within the OEM's warranty.
STEP 2. If the defective part or product is not a motor, send a description containing the specifications of the part/product and the defect to:
Service.Vilter@Emerson.com
If the defective part or product is a motor or starter, please complete the form on the next page and return it to:
Service.Vilter@Emerson.com.

STEP 2. Return the parts (freight prepaid) to:
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION 5555 South Packard Avenue Cudahy, WI 53110-8904

STEP 3. VilterTM will communicate with you, if necessary, to ascertain additional information and will reasonably assist with the OEM to determine the part/product's warranty status.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

7 ­ 1

Motor Warranty Procedure
To facilitate your warranty claim, please follow the steps outlined below: 1. Determination if motor is within the OEM warranty. 2. Please complete the following and return to Service.Vilter@Emerson.com, along with a picture of the motor's nameplate. 3. Vilter will assist with the motor OEM to determine the motor's warranty status.

Model:

____________

Serial Number: ____________

Manufacturer: ____________

Run Hours: ____________

Grease Type: ____________

Start Date: ______/_____/____ Month Day Year

Starter Type:
Soft Start Across the Line VFD

Alignment Data Available:

Yes, please include with information

No

Lubrication Records Available: Yes, please include with information

No

Vibration Report:

Yes, please include with information

No

Describe Motor Symptoms:

4. If the motor falls within the OEM's warranty time frame: · The motor will need to be taken to a manufacturer approved shop for diagnosis. Vilter can help with locating motor shops that are manufacturer
approved in your area. The shop will diagnose the root cause, submit a report to the OEM, and the motor OEM will make the determination of warranty coverage. · If warranty is approved, the OEM will either have the motor repaired by the motor shop or send a new replacement motor to the site.
Note: Motor warranty is a "pass thru warranty" as stated in Vilter Manufacturing's standard warranty statement which means that the original motor OEM is the provider of the warranty. Vilter does assist with the expediting of the claim but any dispensation of warranty is provided solely by the motor OEM. Motor manufacturer warranty covers only repair or replacement of the motor. It does not cover removal and installation charges, incidental charges associated with the removal and installation process, loss of product or shipping to and from the manufacturer or approved shop. This is standard motor manufacturer warranty policy regardless of brand or application. If the end user requires additional information regarding warranty coverage, the individual motor manufacturer warranty terms can be found on their associated websites.

Section 7 · Warranty and Parts

STEP 4. For defective motor or starter claims, if the motor or starter falls within the OEM's warranty time frame: · The motor or starter will need to be taken to a man-
ufacturer approved shop for diagnosis. VilterTM can help you locate motor shops in your area that are manufacturer approved. The shop will diagnose the root cause, submit a report to the OEM, and the motor OEM will make the determination of warranty coverage. · If a warranty claim is approved, the OEM will either have the motor or starter repaired by the motor shop or send a new replacement motor to the site.
On-Site Service Support
If on site support is required, contact a Vilter S&W department representative to start this process. Warranty does not cover labor or expenses.
1. A quote, a service rate sheet, and the service terms and conditions will be provided.
2. Submit a PO. 3. Schedule the service visit.
Remanufactured Bare Shaft Single Screw Compressor Process
These instructions are an overview of how the process works when a bare shaft compressor is in need of being remanufactured. This is to help clear any questions that may arise prior to contacting customer service. The process begins by contacting Vilter's Customer Service Department. Vilter contact information can be found on page iii.
· Request a "VSS/VSM Single Screw Compressor Rebuild Form".
· Submit the Rebuild Form and a Purchase Order (PO) for the inspection. A fee is required for the initial inspection and tear down report; contact Vilter Customer Service representative for the latest fee.
· A Return Material Authorization (RMA) number will be provided.
· Send the compressor to Vilter in the condition as stated on the Rebuild Form (i.e. no oil in the compressor). Charges may apply if conditions are not met.

· A report will be sent to you after the inspection has been completed explaining what level of rebuild is necessary along with the cost. NOTE Inspection and rebuild times will vary, contact Vilter Customer Service representative for further details.
· Submit a new PO for the amount that will be needed for the rebuild. The inspection cost will be waived upon receipt of the new PO. Make sure to provide your "Ship to Address" and "Billing Address".
Explanation of Rebuild Levels
Level 1 Compressor is in good condition. Replace bearings, gaskets, shaft seal and O-rings. All hardware is intended to be re-used (when possible). Parts are organized in part kit form. Level 2 Compressor is in good condition, but requires new gate rotor blades. Replace all items in Level 1 plus new gate rotor blades and bushings. Level 3 Current Reman Compressor requires complete rebuilding and re-conditioning to "as-new" condition. All the components listed in Level 2 are replaced plus all hardware, slide assemblies, pistons, and a main rotor (if damaged) and/or gate rotor supports.
NOTE A Level 1 and Level 2 rebuild will include washing the housing and repainting over the current paint. A Level 3 rebuild will include blasting all the current
paint off before repainting.
Bare Shaft Compressor Description
Single Screw Bare Shaft Compressor features include: · Cast grey iron frame with cast ductile iron discharge
manifold and gate rotor covers with discharge connection horizontal. · Standard drive shaft is tapered. · Standard slide assembly. · Viton shaft seal O-rings. · Crating with Purge & Gauge. · Does not include hand wheels or slide valve motors.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

7 ­ 3

7 ­ 4 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List
VSH/VSSH Recommended Spare Parts List
For VSH/VSSH compressor spare parts, please contact Vilter Engineering Service for the list.
Note Please have your Model # and Sales Order # available when ordering.
These are found on the compressor's Name Plate.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 1

8 - 2 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

VSS Recommended Spare Parts List
Refer to the Custom Manual Spare Parts Section for Specific Applications
Please have your Model # and Sales Order # available when ordering. These are found on the compressor's Name Plate.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 3

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Gaterotor

*For VSS Models from 451 to 2101

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 4

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Gaterotor

MODEL NUMBER

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

VSS 451

VSS 601

VSS 751

QTY VPN QTY VPN QTY VPN

Gaterotor BLADE AND BEARING REPLACEMENT KIT (111, 118,

-

120A, 120B, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 130, 131, 141, AR KT712A AR KT712B AR KT712C

142, 143)

-

Gaterotor BLADE REPLACEMENT KIT (111, 118, 120A, 120B, 121, 122, 123, 124, 130, 141, 142, 143)

AR

KT713A

AR

KT713B

AR

KT713C

100

SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 110 & 135B.

2 A25159BB 2 A25159BA 2 A25159CB

102 Gaterotor SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (100, 111, 120B, 119, 130) 2 A25161BB 2 A25161BA 2 A25161CB

105

Gaterotor GASKET SET (118, 141, 142, 143)

2 A25164B 2 A25164B 2 A25164C

106

SHIM PACK SET ((2) 121, (2) 122, (1) 123, (1) 124)

2 A25165B 2 A25165B 2 A25165C

110

SUPPORT

2 25606A 2 25520A 2 25612A

111

Gaterotor

2 25557A 2 25534A 2 25608A

112

SMALL BEARING HOUSING

2 25518D 2 25518D -

N/A

113

LARGE BEARING HOUSING

2 25517A 2 25517A -

N/A

114

RETAINER

2 25008A 2 25008A -

N/A

115

RETAINER

2 25009A 2 25009A -

N/A

116

BALL BEARING COVER

2 25258A 2 25258A -

N/A

117

Gaterotor COVER

2 25519A 2 25519A -

N/A

118

Gaterotor COVER GASKET

2 25259A 2 25259A 2 25088A

119

WASHER

2 25007A 2 25007A 2 25086A

120A

BUSHING, SMALL DOWEL PIN

2 25006A 2 25006A 2 25087A

120B

BUSHING, LARGE DOWEL PIN

2 25760A 2 25760A 2 25760B

121

SHIM 0.002"

AR 25010AA AR 25010AA AR 25089AA

122

SHIM 0.003"

AR 25010AB AR 25010AB AR 25089AB

123

SHIM 0.005"

AR 25010AC AR 25010AC AR 25089AC

124

SHIM 0.010"

AR 25010AD AR 25010AD AR 25089AD

125

ROLLER BEARING

2

2864B

2

2864B

2

2864C

126

BALL BEARING

4 2865BP 4 2865BP 4 2865A

130

RETAINING RING

2 2866A 2 2866A 2 2866B

131

RETAINING RING

2 2867A 2 2867A 2 2867E

135A

DOWEL PIN, SM, 0.250" O.D.

2

2868B

2

2868B

2

2868F

135B

DOWEL PIN, LG, 0.4375" O.D.

2 25910A 2 25910A 2 25910B

141

O-RING ROLLER BEARING HOUSING

2 2176M 2 2176M 2 2176N

142

O-RING BALL BEARING HOUSING

2

2176R

2

2176R

2 2176CQ

143

O-RING BRG HSG COVER

2 2176N 2 2176N 2 2176U

150

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW ( 1/4-20 NC X 1-1/4 )

12 2796AJ 12 2796AJ -

N/A

151

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (5/16-18 NC X 1-1/4)

6

2796B

6

2796B

-

N/A

152

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW ( 3/8-16 NC X 1-1/4)

40 2796CJ 40 2796CJ -

N/A

153

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (1/4-20 NC X 1)

32 2795E 32 2795E

-

N/A

160

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW

12 2795E 12 2795E

-

N/A

AR = As required

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 5

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Gaterotor

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

Gaterotor BLADE AND BEARING

-

REPLACEMENT KIT (111, 118, 120A, 120B, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126,

130, 131, 141, 142, 143)

Gaterotor BLADE REPLACEMENT KIT - (111, 118, 120A, 120B, 121, 122, 123,
124, 130, 141, 142, 143)

100 SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 110 & 135B.

102

Gaterotor SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (100, 111, 120B, 119, 130)

105

Gaterotor GASKET SET (118, 141, 142, 143)

106

SHIM PACK SET ((2) 121, (2) 122, (1) 123, (1) 124)

110

SUPPORT

111

Gaterotor

118

Gaterotor COVER GASKET

119

WASHER

120A

BUSHING, SMALL DOWEL PIN

120B

BUSHING, LARGE DOWEL PIN

121

SHIM 0.002"

122

SHIM 0.003"

123

SHIM 0.005"

124

SHIM 0.010"

125

ROLLER BEARING

126

BALL BEARING

130

RETAINING RING

131

RETAINING RING

135A

DOWEL PIN, SM, 0.250" O.D.

135B

DOWEL PIN, LG, 0.4375" O.D.

141 O-RING ROLLER BEARING HOUSING

142 O-RING BALL BEARING HOUSING

143

O-RING BRG HSG COVER

VSS 901 QTY VPN
AR KT712D

AR KT713D

2 A25159CA 2 A25161CA

2 A25164C

2 A25165C

2 25553A

2 25554A

2 25088A

2 25086A

2 25087A

2 25760B

AR 25089AA

AR 25089AB

AR 25089AC

AR 25089AD

2

2864C

4

2865A

2

2866B

2

2867E

2

2868F

2 25910B

2

2176N

2 2176CQ

2

2176U

VSS 1051

QTY

VPN

AR KT712E

AR KT713E

2 A25159DB 2 A25161DB

2 A25164D

2 A25165C

2 25614A

2 25610A

2 25132A

2 25086A

2 25104A

2 25760B

AR 25089AA

AR 25089AB

AR 25089AC

AR 25089AD

2

2864G

4

2865A

2

2866B

2

2867L

2

2868H

2 25910B

2

2176AJ

2 2176AM

2

2176U

VSS 1201 QTY VPN
AR KT712F

AR KT713F

2 A25159DA 2 A25161DA

2 A25164D

2 A25165C

2 25587A

2 25588A

2 25132A

2 25086A

2 25104A

2 25760B

AR 25089AA

AR 25089AB

AR 25089AC

AR 25089AD

2

2864G

4

2865A

2

2866B

2

2867L

2

2868H

2 25910B

2 2176AJ

2 2176AM

2

2176U

VSS 1301

QTY

VPN

AR KT712Y

AR KT713Y

2 A25161DH

2 A25164D

2 A25165C

2 25587A

2 25588F

2 25132A

2 25086A

2 25104A

2 25760B

AR 25089AA

AR 25089AB

AR 25089AC

AR 25089AD

2

2864G

4

2865A

2

2866B

2

2867L

2

2868H

2 25910B

2

2176AJ

2 2176AM

2

2176U

AR = As required

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 6

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Gaterotor

MODEL NUMBER

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

VSS 1551

VSS 1501

VSS 1801

QTY VPN QTY VPN QTY VPN

Gaterotor BLADE AND BEARING REPLACEMENT KIT (111,

-

118, 120A, 120B, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 130, 131, AR KT712L AR KT712G AR KT712H*

141, 142, 143)

-

Gaterotor BLADE REPLACEMENT KIT (111, 118, 120A, 120B, 121, 122, 123, 124, 130, 141, 142, 143)

AR

KT713G

AR

KT713G

AR KT713H*

101

Gaterotor ASSEMBLY (111, 120)

2 A25160EB 2 A25160EB 2 A25160EA

102 Gaterotor SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (100, 111, 120B, 119, 130) 2 A25161EB 2 A25161EB 2 A25161EA

104

SHIM 350MM GATEROTOR BALL BRG VSS

2 25977U

105

Gaterotor GASKET SET (118, 141, 142, 143)

2 A25164E 2 A25164E 2 A25164E

106

SHIM PACK SET ((2) 121, (2) 122, (1) 123, (1) 124)

2 A25165E 2 A25165E 2 A25165E

110

SUPPORT

2 25665C 2 25087A 2 25665E

111

Gaterotor

2 25647A 2 25647A 2 25645A

112

SMALL BEARING HOUSING

2 26507A 2 25667A 2 25667A

113

LARGE BEARING HOUSING

2 26506A 2 25669A 2 25669A

114

RETAINER

2 25141A 2 25141A 2 25141A

115

RETAINER

2 25789A 2 25789A 2 25789A

116

BALL BEARING COVER

2 25351A 2 25351A 2 25351A

117

Gaterotor COVER

2 26508B 2 25354A 2 25354A

118

Gaterotor COVER GASKET

2 26509A 2 25790A 2 25790A

119

WASHER

2 25788A 2 25788A 2 25788A

120A

BUSHING, SMALL DOWEL PIN

-

N/A

2 25104A 2 25104A

120B

BUSHING, LARGE DOWEL PIN

2 25760C 2 25104A 2 25104A

121

SHIM 0.002"

AR 25791AA AR 25791AA AR 25791AA

122

SHIM 0.003"

AR 25791AB AR 25791AB AR 25791AB

123

SHIM 0.005"

AR 25791AC AR 25791AC AR 25791AC

124

SHIM 0.010"

AR 25791AD AR 25791AD AR 25791AD

125

ROLLER BEARING

2

2864K

2

2864K

2

2864K

126

BALL BEARING

4

2865K

4

2865K

4

2865K

130

RETAINING RING

2 2866G 2 2866G 2 2866G

131

RETAINING RING

2

2867R

2

2867R

2 2867R

135A

DOWEL PIN, SM, 0.250" O.D.

-

N/A

2 2868H 2 2868H

135B

DOWEL PIN, LG, 0.4375" O.D.

2 25910C 2 2868H 2 2868H

141

O-RING ROLLER BEARING HOUSING

2

2176U

2

2176U

2

2176U

142

O-RING BALL BEARING HOUSING

2 2176BD 2 2176BD 2 2176BD

143

O-RING BRG HSG COVER

2

2176P

2

2176P

2

2176P

150

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW ( 1/4-20 NC X 1-1/4 )

12 2796CJ 12 2796CJ 12 2796CJ

151

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (5/16-18 NC X 1-1/4)

8 2796N 8 2796N 8 2796N

152

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW ( 3/8-16 NC X 1-1/4)

32 2796CJ 32 2796CJ 32 2796CJ

153

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (1/4-20 NC X 1)

44 2796R 44 2796R 44 2796R

160

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW

16 2795G 16 2795G 16 2795G

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. PAaRrt=s Athsarteaqpupireeadr on diagrams might be shown separatel*yFfoorr rseeferiraelnncuem, bbuetrasrebesfooldrea5s5a8n0asse*m* Fbolyr osrekriat lonnulym. bers after 5580

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 7

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Gaterotor

MODEL NUMBER

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

VSS 1851

VSS 2101

QTY VPN QTY

VPN

-

Gaterotor BLADE AND BEARING REPLACEMENT KIT (111, 118, 120A, 120B, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 130, 131, 141, 142, 143)

AR

KT712M*

AR

KT712K* KT712KN**

-

Gaterotor BLADE REPLACEMENT KIT (111, 118, 120A, 120B, 121, 122, 123, 124, 130, 141, 142, 143)

AR

KT713H*

AR

KT713L

101

Gaterotor ASSEMBLY (111, 120)

2 A25160EA 2 A25160EA

102

Gaterotor SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (100, 111, 120B, 119, 130)

2 A25161EA 2 A25161EC

104

SHIM 350MM GATEROTOR BALL BRG VSS

2 25977U 2

25977U

105

Gaterotor GASKET SET (118, 141, 142, 143)

2 A25164E 2 A25164E

106

SHIM PACK SET ((2) 121, (2) 122, (1) 123, (1) 124)

2 A25165E 2 A25165E

110

SUPPORT

2 25665E 2

25665D

111

Gaterotor

2 25645A 2

25744D

112

SMALL BEARING HOUSING

2 26507A 2

26507A

113

LARGE BEARING HOUSING

2 26506A 2

26506A

114

RETAINER

2 25141A 2

25141A

115

RETAINER

2 25789A 2

25789A

116

BALL BEARING COVER

2 25351A 2

25351A

117

Gaterotor COVER

2 26508B 2

26508B

118

Gaterotor COVER GASKET

2 26509A 2

26509A

119

WASHER

2 25788A 2

25788A

120A

BUSHING, SMALL DOWEL PIN

-

N/A

-

N/A

120B

BUSHING, LARGE DOWEL PIN

2 25760C 2

25760C

121

SHIM 0.002"

AR 25791AA AR 25791AA

122

SHIM 0.003"

AR 25791AB AR 25791AB

123

SHIM 0.005"

AR 25791AC AR 25791AC

124

SHIM 0.010"

AR 25791AD AR 25791AD

125

ROLLER BEARING

2

2864K

2

2864K

126

BALL BEARING

4

2865K

4

2865K

130

RETAINING RING

2

2866G

2

2866G

131

RETAINING RING

2

2867R

2

2867R

135A

DOWEL PIN, SM, 0.250" O.D.

-

N/A

-

N/A

135B

DOWEL PIN, LG, 0.4375" O.D.

2 25910C 2

25910C

141

O-RING ROLLER BEARING HOUSING

2

2176U

2

2176U

142

O-RING BALL BEARING HOUSING

2 2176BD 2

2176BD

143

O-RING BRG HSG COVER

2

2176P

2

2176P

150

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW ( 1/4-20 NC X 1-1/4 )

12 2796CJ 12

2796CJ

151

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (5/16-18 NC X 1-1/4)

8

2796N

8

2796N

152

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW ( 3/8-16 NC X 1-1/4)

32 2796CJ 32

2796CJ

153

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (1/4-20 NC X 1)

44 2796R 44

2796R

160

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW

16 2795G 16

2795G

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor.

APRart=s Athsarteaqpupireeadr on diagrams might b* eFsohroswenriaslenpuarmatbeelyrsfobrerfeofreere5n5c8e0, but are sold as an asse**mFbolyr soer rkiiatlonnulym. bers after 5580

8 - 8

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Gaterotor
TIGHTEN TO 33 FT-LBS 14 5

INSTALL RETAINER WITH BEVEL FACING GATEROTOR 9
2 8 TIGHTEN TO 154 FT-LBS 12
TIGHTEN TO 78 FT-LBS 11 TIGHTEN TO 54 FT-LBS 13

15 CHECK GATEROTOR FLOAT
4 AFTER ASSEMBLY
1 6 10 TIGHTEN TO 19 FT-LBS
USE BLUE LOCTITE USE SHIMS TO ACHIEVE 3 0.003"- 0.004" SHELF CLEARANCE 7
*VSS 2401 thru VSS 3001 Only

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 9

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Gaterotor

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

-

Gaterotor BLADE AND BEARING REPLACEMENT KIT

-

Gaterotor BLADE REPLACEMENT KIT

001

BALL BEARING

002

SEAL GATEROTOR

003

SHIM

004

SUPPORT

005

BEARING HOUSING

006

GATEROTOR BEARING HOUSING COVER

007

GATEROTOR COVER

008

RETAINING RING (3.346 X 0.109) BEVELED

009

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (5/16 -18 NC X 1-1/4)

010

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (1/2-13 NC X1-3/4)

011

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (5/8-11 NC X 2-3/4)

012

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (3/8-16 NC X 1-3/4)

013

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW (3/8-16 NC X 1-1/4)

014

ROLLER BEARING SHIM

015

BEARING RETAINER

VSS 2401 VSS 2601

QTY

VPN

VPN

VSS 2801 VPN

VSS 3001 VPN

AR

KT712N

KT712P

KT712Q KT712QAF*

KT712R

AR

KT713P

KT713Q

KT713R KT713RAF*

KT713S

1 A25163G A25163G A25163G A25163G

1

A25164F A25164F A25164F A25164F

1

A25165F A25165F A25165F A25165F

1 A25222FH A25222FG A25222FF A25222FE

1

26089B 26089B

26089B

26089B

1

25789B 25789B

25789B

25789B

1

26087B 26087B

26087B

26087B

1

26132C 26132C

26132C

26132C

1

2867R

2867R

2867R

2867R

4

2796B

2796B

2796B

2796B

10

2796EL

2796EL

2796EL

2796EL

24 2796GQ 2796GQ 2796GQ 2796GQ

10

2795AH 2795AH

2795AH

2795AH

6

2796CJ

2796CJ

2796CJ

2796CJ

1

25977Z 25977Z

25977Z

25977Z

AR = As required

* AFLAS

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 10

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Shaft Seal

Shaft Seal With Stationary Carbon Face

230

260

219

ITEM
230 260

DESCRIPTION

MODEL NUMBER

QTY

VSS 291 thru VSS 601

VSS 751 thru VSS 1301

VSS 1551 thru VSS 2101

SHAFT SEAL AMM KIT (219, 230, 260) 1

KT709A

KT709B

KT709E

SHAFT SEAL R22 KIT (219, 230, 260) 1

KT781A

KT781B

KT781C

OIL SEAL

1

25040A

2930F

2930B

O-RING

1

2176F

2176AC

2176BH

VSS 2401 thru VSS 3001 KT709F KT781F 2930G 2176BD

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 11

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

ITEM

MODEL NUMBER

QTY

207

201

DESCRIPTION

SHIM PACK

ROTOR ASSEMBLY

VSS 451 1 A25177B A25226BB

VSS 601 1 A25177B A25226BA

VSS 751 1 A25177C A25226CB

VSS 901 1 A25177C A25226CA

VSS 1051 1 A25177D A25226DB

VSS 1201 1 A25177D A25226DA

VSS 1301 1 A25177D A25752HA

VSS 1501 1 A25177E A25226EB

VSS 1551 1 A25177E A25226EC

VSS 1801 1 A25177E A25226EA

VSS 1851 1 A25177E A25226ED

VSS 2101 1 A25177E A25226EE

Main Rotor

*For VSS Models from 451 to 2101

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 12

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Main Rotor

*VSS 2401 thru VSS 3001 Only

ITEM 102

DESCRIPTION
ROTOR ASSEMBLY SHIM PACK

MODEL NUMBER QTY VSS 2401 VSS 2601 VSS 2801 VSS 3001
1 A25226AN A25226AM A25226AL A25226AK 1 A25177G A25177G A25177G A25177G

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 13

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Slide Valve Cross Shafts and End Plate
*For VSS Models from 451 to 2101

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 14

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Slide Valve Cross Shafts and End Plate

MODEL NUMBER

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

QTY

VSS 291 thru
VSS 601

QTY

VSS 751 thru
VSS 901

QTY

VSS 1051 thru
VSS 1301

QTY

VSS 1501 VSS 1801

QTY

VSS 1551 thru
VSS 2101

221

SHAFT

2 25843A 2 25844A 2 25845A 2 25793A 2 25793A

222

GEAR

4 25027A 4 25027A 4 25027A 4 25027A 4 25027A

226

RACK CLAMP

2 25913A 4 25913C 4 25913C

4 25913C

227

RACK CLAMP

2 25913B -

N/A

-

N/A

-

-

N/A

228

SPACER

2 25847A 4 25033C 4 25033C 4 25033C 4 25033C

267

DOWEL PIN

-

N/A

2

2868B

2

2868B

2

2868B

2

2868B

268 EXPANSION PIN

4 1193D

4

1193D 4 1193D

2

1193D 4 1193D

269 EXPANSION PIN

4 2981AA 4 2981AA 4 2981AA 2 2981AA 4 2981AA

270

PIPE PLUG

-

N/A

2

2606E

2

2606E

2

2606E

2

2606A

286

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW

8

2795F

8

2795F

8

2795F

8

2795F

8

2795F

297

SET SCREW

2

2060J

2

2060J

2

2060J

2

2060J

298

SET SCREW

2 2060H 2 2060H 2 2060H

2 2060H

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 15

Section 8 · Spare Parts List End Plate (VSS 2401 - VSS 3001 Only)

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 16

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

End Plate (VSS 2401 - VSS 3001 Only)

ITEM

VSS 2401 thru VSS 3001

Quantity

018

PIPE PLUG SOCKET HEX

2

019

O-RING (1.609 X 1.887) NEOPRENE

2

270

FLUSH SEAL PLUG 3/4-14 NPTF SOCKET HEAD

2

269

ROLL PIN (M2.5 X 26) STEEL

4

286 SCREW (1/4-20 NC X 2) CAP SOCKET HEAD ASTM A574

8

226

RACK CLAMP

4

298

SET SCREW (10-32 NF X 3/16) CUP PNT HEX

4

222

GEAR

4

220

END PLATE ASSEMBLY

1

221

COMMAND SHAFT

1

268

ROLL PIN (.187 X 1)

4

267

DOWEL PIN (1/4 X 1) STEEL

2

DESCRIPTION 13163F 2176X 2606A 2981AA 2795Q 25913E 2060H 25027A
A25849FA A25849FAAF* A25849FAV**
A25994F A25994FAF* A25994FV**
1193D 2868B

* AFLAS ** VITON

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 17

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Volume Slide

Slide Valve Carriage Assembly

Capacity Slide

Carriage Assembly

*For VSS Models from 451 to 2101

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 18

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Slide Valve Carriage Assembly

MODEL NUMBER

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

QTY

VSS 291 thru
VSS 601

QTY

VSS 751 thru
VSS 901

QTY

VSS 1051 VSS 1201

QTY

VSS 1501 thru
VSS 2101

300

CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY

2 A25179B 2 A25179C 2 A25179D 2 A25179E

304 CAPACITY PISTON (340, 341, 350, 355)

2 A25183B 2 A25183C 2 A25183D 2 A25183E

305

VOLUME PISTON (340, 342, 350, 355)

2 A25184B 2 A25184C 2 A25184D 2 A25184E

307A

GASKET (345)

2 25900A -

N/A

-

N/A

2 A25200E

307B

GASKET SET (345, 378)

-

N/A

2 A25200C 2 A25200D -

N/A

316

RACK

2 25024AH 2 25080AH 2 25080CH 2 25779AH

323

RACK

2 25023AH 2 25080BH 2 25080DH 2 25080DH

325

SHAFT

-

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

2 25778A

340

PISTON

-

N/A

4 25076A 4 25138A 4 25782A

341

CAPACITY PISTON SHAFT

-

N/A

2 25078A 2 25078E 2 25784A

342

VOLUME PISTON SHAFT

-

N/A

2 25078B 2 25078F 2 25783A

343A

COVER, SEPARATE VOL. & CAP.

4 25022A 2 25123B 4 25123D -

N/A

343B

COVER, ONE PIECE CAST

2 25399D 2 25279A 2 25401A 2 25690A

344

COVER, SEPARATE VOL. & CAP.

-

N/A

2 25123A -

N/A

-

N/A

345A GASKET, SEPARATE VOL. & n/a CAP COVERS. 4 25021A 2 25124B 4 25124C -

N/A

345B

GASKET, ONE PIECE CAST COVER

2 25900A 2 25902A 2 25901A 2 25384A

346

GASKET, ONE PIECE CAST COVER

-

N/A

2 25124A -

N/A

-

N/A

347

PISTON SLEEVE

-

N/A

2 25079A -

N/A

4 25786A

350

PISTON RING SET

4 2953AA 4 2953AB 4 2953AC 4 2953AD

355

EXPANSION PIN

4 1193PP 4 1193PP 4 1193PP 4 1193PP

359

PIPE PLUG

6 2606D 6 2606D 6 2606D 6 2606E

360

LOCK WASHER (PAIR)

4 3004C 4 3004C 4 3004C 4 3004C

361

WASHER

4 13265B 4 13265B 4 13265B 4 13265B

363

NUT

8 2797A 8 2797A 8 2797A 8 2797A

366A

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW, SEPARATE VOL. & CAP COVERS.

24

2796N

12

2796B

24

2796B

-

N/A

366B

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW, ONE PIECE CAST COVER.

24 2796B 12 2796P 24 2796P 28 3796BL

367

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW

-

N/A

12 2796BN -

N/A

-

N/A

373

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW

-

N/A

6 2795N 6 2795P 6 2795AG

374

LOCK WASHER (PAIR)

-

N/A

6 3004C 6 3004D 6 3004D

378

O-RING

-

N/A

2 2176Y -

N/A

4 2176AG

380

RETAINER RING

-

N/A

2 2866C -

N/A

4 2866G

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 19

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Slide Valve Carriage Assembly

*VSS 2401 thru VSS 3001 Only

ITEM
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
111
112
113 114 115

DESCRIPTION
CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY CAPACITY PISTON VOLUME PISTON SMALL PISTON SEAL PISTON COVER
SMALL CAPACITY PISTON SLEEVE PISTON SHAFT GUIDE WASHER
CAP SM PIPE NIPPLE (1/2 X 2-1/2) PIPE SOCKET PLUG HEX SCREW (5/8-16 NC X 4) CAP
SOCKET NORD LOCK WASHER (.625) PER-
MANENTLY TIGHT RETAINING RING (2.875 X 0.093)
INT BEVELED RETAINING RING (3.500) EXTER-
NAL BASIC VOLUME PISTON SLEEVE PISTON SHAFT GUIDE WASHER

MODEL NUMBER VSS 2401
QTY thru VSS 3001
1 A25179K 1 A25183GS 1 A25184GS 1 A25200FS 1 A25220F 1 26113E
1 26115D
1 13189D 3 13163F
3 2795BE
3 3004H
2 2867AQ
2 2866AC
1 26114E 1 26115C

8 - 20

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Actuator & Command Shaft

MODEL NUMBER

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

VSS 291 QTY thru
VSS 601

VSS 751 VSS 1051 VSS 1551 VSS 2401

thru VSS 1201 thru

thru

VSS 901 VSS 1301 VSS 2101 VSS 3001

400 COMMAND SHAFT ASSEMBLY 2 A25994B A25994C A25994D A25994E A25994F

401

SLIDE VALVE ACTUATOR

2 25972D 25972D 25972D 25972D 25972D

446

O-RING SEAL

2 2176X 2176X 2176X 2176X 2176X

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 21

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Miscellaneous Frame Components VSS Screw Compressor
*

* *For VSS Models from 451 to 2101

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 22

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Miscellaneous Frame Components

MODEL NUMBER

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

QTY

VSS 291 thru VSS
601

QTY

VSS 751 VSS 901

QTY

VSS 1051 VSS 1201

QTY

VSS 1301

-

GASKET & O-RING KIT

1 KT710AN 1 KT710B 1 KT710C 1

KT710J

504A FLANGE SET (513A, 514A, 545A) 1 A25190A 1 A25190A 1 A25190B 1 A25190A

504B* FLANGE SET (513B, 514B, 545B) 2 A25190B -

N/A

2 A25190B 2 A25190B

504C* FLANGE SET (513B, 514C, 545C) -

N/A

2 A25190A -

N/A

-

N/A

506A

PLUG SET, ECONOMIZER (514C, 528, 545B)

1

A25243BE

1

A25243CC

1

A25243DC 1

A25243DD

506B

PLUG SET, ECONOMIZER (514A, 514C, 528, 545C)

-

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

511

DISCHARGE MANIFOLD

1 25502A 1 25540A 1 25597A

512

MANIFOLD GASKET

1 25503A 1 25541A

1

25324A 1

25324A

513A

FLANGE

1 25058ASW 1 25058ASW 1 25058B 1 25058ASW

513B

FLANGE

2 25058B 2 25058ASW 2

25058B 2

25058B

514A

GASKET

1 11323D 1 11323D

1

11323E 1

11323D

514B

GASKET

2 11323E -

N/A

2

11323E 2

11323E

514C

GASKET

2 11323D 2 11323S

2

11323E 2

11323E

518

GASKET, SUCTION

1 25199C 1 25199C

1

25199D 1

25199D

519

GASKET, DISCHARGE

1 25199B 1 25199B

1

25199C 1

25199C

528

ECONOMIZER PLUG

2 25397G 2 25397A

2

25391D 2

25391A

530

O-RING

2 2176AB 2

2176J

2

2176J

2

2176AB

536

PIPE PLUG 3/4" MPT

-

N/A

-

N/A

6

2606A

6

2606A

540

DOWEL PIN

2

2868B

2

2868B

2

2868B

2

2868B

542

PIPE PLUG 3/4" MPT

-

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

545A

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW

2 2796GP 2 2796GP 2

2796C

2

2796GP

545B

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW

4

2796C

4

2796C

4

2796C

4

2796C

545C

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW

-

N/A

4 2796GP -

N/A

-

N/A

547

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW

8

2796C 24 2796GP 24 2796GP 24

2796F

QTY
1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 2 1 4 -

VSS 1501 VSS 1801 KT710D A25190C A25190A
25663A 25676A 12477C
N/A 11323F
N/A N/A 25199D 25199C 25393A
2606E 2868K 13163F 11397E N/A N/A N/A

QTY
1 1 2 -
-
1
1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 4 4 12 -

VSS 1551 thru VSS
2101 KT710D A25190C A25190D
N/A
N/A
A25243ED
25676A 12477C 25058ASW 11323F 11323S 11323G 25199D 25199C 25393A 2176J 2606A 2868K 13163F 11397E 2796GP 11397E
N/A

8 - 23

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Miscellaneous Frame Components

*VSS 2401 thru VSS 3001 Only

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

QTY

VSS 2401 thru VSS 3001

504

FLANGE SET 1.250 VSS 401MM

1

A25190EA

505

TUBING VSS2401-3001

1

A25201F

536 PLUG 1/2-14NPTF FLUSH SEAL SOC HD 2

2606E

538 PLUG 3/4-14NPTF FLUSH SEAL SOC HD 3

2606A

539

PLUG, LIQUID INJECTION

4

26293A

540

O-RING 0.171X0.499 NEOPRENE

4

2176DD

*

GASKET & O-RING KIT

1

KT710E

*

FLANGE

1

12478G

*

PLUG SET, ECONOMIZER

1

A25243BB

NOTES * Not Shown

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 24

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List
Miscellaneous Frame Components (Tubing and Fittings)
Gaterotor BEARING SUPPLY LINES

VSS 451 THRU VSS 1801
SEAL CHAMBER OIL LINE

VSS 451 THRU VSS 1201

VSS 1501 & VSS 1801

SLIDE VALVE BALANCE PISTON EQUALIZING LINE

VSS 451 & VSS 601

VSS 751 & VSS 901

VSS 1051 & VSS 1201

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 25

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Miscellaneous Frame Components (Tubing and Fittings)

ITEM
555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562
563
564 565 566 567 568

DESCRIPTION
ELBOW 1/4 ODT X 1/4 MPT 90° MALE STRAIGHT 1/4 ODT X 1/4 MPT
TEE, RUNNING 1/4 OD X 1/4 MPT MALE HEX BUSHING HEX BUSHING
ELBOW 3/8 ODT X 1/2 MPT 90° MALE ELBOW 3/8 OD X 1/4 MPT 90° MALE
PLUG TEE 1/4 ODT X 1/4 ODT X 1/4 MPT
BRANCH TEE 1/4 TEE 1/4T X 1/4T X 1/4 FPT FEMALE NIPPLE 1/4 X 2-1/2 PIPE CONNECTOR 1/2-13 NC-2 X 1 SET REDUCING BUSHING 1 X 1/4

MODEL NUMBER

QTY

VSS 451 VSS 601

QTY

VSS 751 VSS 901

QTY

VSS 1051 VSS 1201

QTY

VSS 1501 VSS 1801

5 13375D 5 13375D 3 13375D 2 13375D

1 13229D 1 13229D 2 13229D -

N/A

1 1509A 1 1509A 1 1509A 1 13376D

1 13231AA 1 13231AA 1 1101H 1 13231AA

-

N/A

-

N/A

1 1101K 1 1101K

1 13375Z 1 13375Z 1 13375Z 1 13375Z

1 13375F 1 13375F 1 13375F -

N/A

1 2606E 1 2606E 1 2606A -

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

2 13376D -

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

1 13239C -

N/A

-

N/A

2 1884A -

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

2 13181D -

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

1 13299C

-

N/A

-

N/A

-

N/A

1 1101M

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 26

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List
Miscellaneous Frame Components (Tubing and Fittings) (VSS 2401 - VSS 3001)

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

555

MALE ELBOW (3/8 ODX 1/4MPT) 90°

557 BRANCH MLE TEE (1/4ODTX1/4ODTX1/4MPT)

560

MALE ELBOW (1/4ODTX1/4MPT) 90°

567 COMPRESSION CONNECTOR (3/8 ODT X 1/8MPT)

568

BUSHING (1 X 1/4) HEXAGON

570

UNION TUBE TEE (3/8)

573

BRANCH MALE TEE (3/80 DT X 1/4MPT)

571

STEEL TUBING (1/4 X .035) SMLS

572

STEEL TUBING (3/8 X .035) SMLS

QTY
2.00 1.00 2.00 1.00 2.00 1.00 1.00 2.00 4.00

VSS 2401VSS 3001 13375F 13376D 13375D 13229W 1101M 13239E
2084A 3509A 3509B

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 27

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Replacement Tools

291 1551

ITEM
900 901A 901B
8 - 28

DESCRIPTION
Gaterotor TOOLS Gaterotor STABILIZER SET (901A,
901B, 901C) Gaterotor STABILIZER SET (901A,
901B, 901C, 901D)

VSS 291 QTY thru VSS
601 1 A25205B
1 A25698A

MODEL NUMBER

VSS 751 VSS 901

VSS 1051 VSS 1201 VSS 1301

VSS 1551 thru VSS
2101

A25205C A25205C A25205E

A25698A A25698A

N/A

VSS 2401 thru VSS 3001
A25205F
N/A

1

N/A

N/A

N/A

A25699A

N/A

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Replacement Parts

COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

VPN QTY

WHERE USED

Strainer Screen, 4" & 5"

2881A 1

4" & 5" Suction Strainer

VSS Units Suction Strainer

Strainer Screen, 6" Strainer Screen, 8" Strainer Cover Gasket Strainer Cover Gasket

2881B 1 2881C 1 2555E 1 2555F 1

6" Suction Strainer 8" Suction Strainer 4" & 5" Suction Strainer 6" Suction Strainer

Strainer Cover Gasket

2555G 1

8" Suction Strainer

300 Psig R-717 Relief Valve

1498GG 2

300 Psig R-717 Dual Relief Valve

250 Psig R-717 Relief Valve

1498EE 2

250 Psig R-717 Dual Relief Valve

Safety Relief Valves

300 Psig Halocarbon Relief Valve, 1/2"x 5/8" 300 Psig Halocarbon Relief Valve, 3/4"x 1"

1498GA 2 300 Psig Halocarbon Dual Relief Valve
1498GJ, 1498GK, 2 300 Psig Halocarbon Dual Relief Valve 1498GKA

300 Psig Halocarbon Relief Valve, 1"x 1"

1498GN 2 300 Psig Halocarbon Dual Relief Valve

2 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve *

2629J

1 2 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System *

5 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve **

2629A 1 5 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System **

10 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve **

2629B

1

10 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System **

15 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve **

2629C

1

15 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System **

20 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve ***

2629D

1

20 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System ***

30 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve ***

2629E

1

30 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System ***

Liquid Injection

50 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve *** 75 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve ***

2629F 2629G

1

50 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System ***

1

75 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System ***

100 Ton R-717 Thermostatic Expansion Valve *** 2629H

1

100 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System ***

Power Head Assembly

2637A

1

2 thru 15 Ton Thermostatic Expansion Valve

Power Head Assembly

2637B

1

20 thru 100 Ton Thermostatic Expansion Valve

120V R-717 Solenoid Valve

2562E

1

5 thru 15 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System

120V R-717 Solenoid Valve

2875F

1

20 thru 100 Ton R-717 Liquid Injection System

Solenoid Valve Coil

2650VA 1 KIT REPLACEMENT W/S8F W/STRAINER

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 29

8 - 30 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

VSM 301-701 Recommended Spare Parts List
Refer to the Custom Manual Spare Parts Section for Specific Applications
Please have your Model # and Sales Order # available when ordering. These are found on the compressor's Name Plate.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 31

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Gaterotor Assembly

8 - 32

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Gaterotor Assembly

Part totals indicated are for one Gaterotor assembly, machines with two Gaterotors will require double the components listed below.

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

QTY VSM 301

VSM 361

MODEL NUMBER VSM 401 QTY VSM 501

VSM 601

VSM 701

Gaterotor BLADE REPLACEMENT KITS

AR

KT1098A

KT1098B

KT1098C

AR KT1098D KT1098E KT1098F

Gaterotor BEARING REPLACEMENT KITS

AR

KT759F

KT759G

KT759H

AR

KT759BG (REMAN)

KT759BH (REMAN)

KT759BJ (REMAN)

105

SEAL GATEROTOR

1

A25164A A25164A A25164A A25164AV* A25164AV* A25164AV*

1

A25164B A25164B A25164B

105.1

O-RING

1

2176L

2176L

2176L

1 2176M 2176M 2176M

105.2

O-RING

1

2176F

2176F

2176F

1 2176R

2176R

2176R

106 SHIM GATEROTOR

1 A25165A A25165A A25165A 1 A25165B A25165B A25165B

108 SUPPORT GATEROTOR 1 A25222AB A25222AA A25222AC 1 A25222BB A25222BA A25222BC

108.1 SUPPORT GATEROTOR 1 A25161AB A25161AA A25161AC 1 A25161BB A25161BA A25161BC

108.2

BALL BEARING

1 A25163A A25163A A25163A 1 A25163B A25163B A25163B

108.3 ROLLER BEARING

1

2864F

2864F

2864F

1 2864B

2864B

2864B

108.4

RETAINING RING 0.781 ID X .065 X .031

1

2928Y

2928Y

2928Y

1 2928W 2928W 2928W

112

HOUSING GATEROTOR ROLLER BEARING

1

25407B

25407B

25407B 1 25407C 25407C 25407C

116

SUPPORT Gaterotor BALL BEARING

1

25408B

25408B

25408B 1 25408C 25408C 25408C

131

RETAINING RING

1

2867S

2867S

2867S

1 2867A

2867A

2867A

RETAINING RING 1.875

132 x 0.062 EXTERNAL

1

BEVELED

2866J

2866J

2866J

1 2866K

2866K

2866K

151

SCREW

1

2795AP

2795AP

2795AP 1 2795AAA 2795AAA 2795AAA

152 SCREW 3/8-16 NC X 1 11 2796CG

2796CG

2796CG 12 2796CG 2796CG 2796CG

155

SHIM

AR 25977D

25977D

25977D AR 25977G 25977G 25977G

156

SHIM

AR 25977C

25977C

25977C AR 25977H 25977H 25977H

170

WASHER .312

1

3004C

3004C

3004C

1 3004C

3004C

3004C

176

PLUG 3/8-18NPTF FLUSH SEAL SOC HD

1

2606D

2606D

2606D

1 2606D

2606D

2606D

NOTES AR = As Required * Viton

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 33

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Shaft Seal

ITEM
* * 219 230 244 252 260 261

DESCRIPTION
SHAFT SEAL KIT (AMM) 219, 230, & 260 SHAFT SEAL KIT (HALO) 219, 230, & 260
SHAFT SEAL. OIL SEAL.
TEFLON SEAL RETAINER RING
O-RING O-RING (205 Only)

NOTES

*

Not pictured.

A

Sold only as kit.

MODEL NUMBER

QTY VSM 301-401 VSM 501-701

1

KT709D

KT709A

1

KT781D

KT781A

1

A

A

1

2930C

25040A

1

25939A

25939A

1

2928M

2928M

1

2176U

2176F

1

2176AE

N/A

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 34

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List
Main Rotor
Models VSM 301-401 Counter Clockwise ONLY Models VSM 501-701 Clockwise ONLY

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

QTY VSM 301

VSM 361

MODEL NUMBER VSM 401 QTY VSM 501

VSM 601

VSM 701

MAIN ROTOR ASSEMBLY. 1 A25226AB A25226AA A25226AC 1 A26010BB A26010BA A26010BC

201

ROTOR

1 A25716AB A25716AA A25716AC 1 A26007BB A26007BA A26007BC

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 35

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Slide Valve Cross Shafts & End Plate
Models VSM 301-401 Counter Clockwise ONLY

Models VSM 501-701 Clockwise ONLY

8 - 36

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Slide Valve Cross Shafts & End Plate

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

MODEL NUMBER QTY VSM 301 VSM 361 VSM 401 QTY VSM 501 VSM 601 VSM 701

OIL BAFFLE ASSEMBLY (1)

-

217, (1) 244, (1) 248, (1)

1 A25942AA A25942AA A25942AA 1 A26034B A26034B A26034B

249, (1) 252

SHIM ASSORTMENT (2) 240, (2) 241, (1) 242, (1) 243

1

A25177A A25177A A25177A 1 A26035B A26035B A26035B

217

OIL BAFFLE PLATE

1 25938A 25938A 25938A

26045A 26045A 26045A

220

END PLATE.

1 25719D 25719D 25719D 1 26025B 26025B 26025B

221

SHAFT

2 25941A 25941A 25941A 2 25843A 25843A 25843A

222

GEAR.

4 25027A 25027A 25027A 4 25027A 25027A 25027A

227

CLAMP.

4 25913A 25913A 25913A -

N/A

N/A

N/A

228

SPACER.

4 25847A 25847A 25847A 4 25847A 25847A 25847A

293

SHIM 0.002"

AR 25409AA 25409AA 25409AA 2 26027BA 26027BA 26027BA

294

SHIM 0.003"

AR 25409AB 25409AB 25409AB 2 26027BB 26027BB 26027BB

295

SHIM 0.005"

AR 25409AC 25409AC 25409AC 1 26027BC 26027BC 26027BC

296

SHIM 0.010"

AR 25409AD 25409AD 25409AD 1 26027BD 26027BD 26027BD

244

TEFLON RING

1 25939A 25939A 25939A 1 25929B 25929B 25929B

248

CHECK VALVE

1

3120A

3120A

3120A 1 3120A 3120A 3120A

249

CHECK VALVE

1

3120B

3120B

3120B

1 3120B 3120B 3120B

252

RETAINING RING

1

2829M

2829M

2829M 1 2928N 2928N 2928N

255

WASHER

-

N/A

N/A

N/A

2 25977E 25977E 25977E

256

WASHER

-

N/A

N/A

N/A

2 25977F 25977F 25977F

268

EXPANSION PIN.

4

1193D

1193D

1193D 4 1193D 1193D 1193D

269

EXPANSION PIN.

4 2981AA 2981AA 2981AA 4 2981AA 2981AA 2981AA

271**

PLUG SOLID

1 25422A 25422A 25422A -

N/A

N/A

N/A

281

HEX HEAD CAP SCREW.

6

2796N

2796N

2796N 8 2796B 2796B 2796B

N2O8T6E: SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW. 8

2795F

**29R7equired at toSpETloScCaRtEeWs.ingle gaterot2or only.2060J

298

SET SCREW.

2

2060H

2795F 2060J 2060H

2795F 2060J 2060H

2 2795D 2795D 2795D 2 2060J 2060J 2060J 2 2060H 2060H 2060H

NOTE: ** Required at top located single gaterotor only.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 37

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Slide Valve Carriage Assembly

Volume Ratio Capacity Slide Carriage Assembly

Assembly Includes Carriage and Slides.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 38

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Slide Valve Carriage Assembly

ITEM
300 304 305 316 318 323 325 350 360 361 363 372*

DESCRIPTION
CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY. CAPACITY PISTON 340, 341, 350 & 355. VOLUME PISTON 340, 342, 350 & 355.
CAPACITY RACK. CAPACITY RACK SHAFT. VOLUME RATIO RACK. VOLUME RATIO RACK SHAFT.
PISTON RING SET. LOCK WASHER (PAIR).
WASHER. NUT.
SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW.

MODEL NUMBER

QTY VSM 301-401 VSM 501-701

1 A25179A

A26012B

1 A25183A

A25183B

1 A25184A

A25184B

1 25023BH

25024AH

1

25772C

25772A

1 25023CH

25023AH

1

25772D

25772B

2

2953AE

2953AA

2

3004C

3004C

2

13265B

13265B

4

2797A

2797A

1

N/A

2795M

NOTES: There are two slide valve carriages per compressor. Each one each has its own Volume Ratio and Capacity slide valves. The above totals are per side of the compressor, double the quantities if both slide valve carriages are being worked on. * = Not Pictured.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 39

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Actuator & Command Shaft

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

MODEL NUMBER QTY VSM 301-401 VSM 501-701

400 COMMAND SHAFT ASSEMBLY 2

A25994A

A25994B

401 SLIDEVALVE ACTUATOR

2

25972D

25972D

446

O-RING SEAL

2

2176X

2176X

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 40

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Miscellaneous Frame Components
VSM 301-401

VSM 501-701

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 41

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Miscellaneous Frame Components

ITEM
512 514 522 523 528 530 540 542 551 570 571 572
*

DESCRIPTION
MANIFOLD GASKET. ECON-O-MIZER GASKET. COUPLING LOCK PLATE
LOCK WASHER ECON-O-MIZER PLUG.
O-RING DOWEL PIN PIPE PLUG HEX HEAD CAP SCREW BEARING OIL PLUG
PLUG SPRING GASKET / O-RING SET

MODEL NUMBER

QTY VSM 301-401 QTY VSM 501-701

1

25737A

1

26037A

2

11323G

2

11323D

-

N/A

1

25004D

-

N/A

1

3004H

2

25419A

2

25397K

-

N/A

2

2176BF

2

2868B

2

2868B

3

2606C

10

2606B

-

N/A

2

2796C

1

25978A

-

N/A

1

25979A

-

N/A

1

3148A

-

N/A

1

KT1075A

1

KT1075B

NOTES. * Not Pictured.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 42

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List

Housing Accessories

Housing Accessories

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

117 Gaterotor COVER.

118 COVER GASKET.

129

GASKET.

180

INLET SCREEN.

343 PISTON COVER. *

NOTES. * Not Pictured.

MODEL NUMBER

QTY VSM 301-701

1

25416B

2

25259B

1

11323T

1

25920A

1

25724B

ITEM
345 346

DESCRIPTION
O-RING. O-RING.

MODEL NUMBER

QTY VSM 301-401 VSM 501-701

4

2176BX

2176CA

2

2176BG

2176BG

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 43

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Replacement Tools

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

QTY

900

GATEROTOR TOOLS

1

901 GATEROTOR STABILIZER. 1

902 SEAL INSTALLATION TOOL 1

MODEL NUMBER

VSM 301-401 VSM 501-701

A25205B

A25205B

25742A

25742B

25455A

25455B

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 44

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Replacement Tools

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

QTY

PART NUMBER

-

GATEROTOR TOOL SET

1 A25205B*

1 STABILIZER GATEROTOR ASSEMBLY 1 A25698A

2

BAR BEARING PULLER

1 25204A

3

SHOE PULLER 1.875

1 25157A

4

SHOE PULLER 2.500

1 25157B

5

JACKSCREW

1 A25156B

6

STUD .375-16 X 4.9

2 25908A

7

STUD .250-20 X 4.4

2 25908B

8

STUD .312-18 X 7.5

2 25908C

- SCREW 1/4-20 NC X 1-3/4 CAP SOCK 2 2795W

9

PLAIN NUT 5/16-18NC-2B HEX

2

1726B

* Assembly A25205B contains all parts listed. Parts are shown independently for illustration purposes only.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 45

Section 8 · Spare Parts List
VSM 97-127 Recommended Spare Parts List
Refer to the Custom Manual Spare Parts Section for Specific Applications
Please have your Model # and Sales Order # available when ordering. These are found on the compressor's Name Plate.

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

8 - 46

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Section 8 · Spare Parts List Kits

Gaterotor Kits For VSM127*

ITEM

VPN

QUANTITY

-

KT759J

1

-

KT1098G

1

*Contact Vilter for Other Sizes

DESCRIPTION Blade & Bearing
Blade

Shaft Seal Kit

ITEM -

VPN KT709P

QUANTITY 1

DESCRIPTION Shaft Seal Kit (143mm Compressor)

Vilter parts get renewed from time to time, so be sure to ask if the part listed in your manual is still the best for your compressor. Parts that appear on diagrams might be shown separately for reference, but are sold as an assembly or kit only.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

8 - 47

8 - 48 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix A · Torque Specifications

Torque Specifications
Refer to the following tables for torque specifications.
Table A-1. Torque Specifications (ft-lbs)

TYPE BOLT

HEAD MARKINGS

NOMINAL SIZE NUMBERS OR INCHES #10 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8

SAE GRADE 2 COARSE (UNC)

5 10 18 29 44 63 87 155 150*

SAE GRADE 5 COARSE (UNC)

8 16 28 44 68 98 135 240 387

SAE GRADE 5 FINE (UNF)

16

SAE GRADE 8 COARSE (UNC)

11 22 39 63 96 138 191 338 546

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW (ASTM A574)
COARSE (UNC)

5 13 26 46 73 112 155 215 380 614

1) Torque values on this sheet are not to override those given on the individual drawings.

NOTES:

2) When using loctite, the torque value on this sheet are only accurate if bolts are tightened immediately after loctite is applied.

* The proof strength of Grade 2 bolts is less for sizes 7/8 and above and therefore the torque values are less than smaller sizes of the same grade.

Table A-2. Torque Specifications for 17-4 Stainless Steel Fasteners (ft-lbs)

Type Bolt/Nut

Head Markings #10

Nominal Size Numbers or Inches ¼" 5/16" 3/8" 7/16" ½" 9/16" 5/8" ¾"

Hex & Socket Head Cap Screws

3

8 14 25 40 60 101 137 245

Nut

-

8

- 25 -

-

-

-

-

NOTE:

Continue use of red loctite #271 (VPN 2205E) on currently applied locations. Use blue loctite #243 (VPN 2205F or 2205G) on all remaining locations.

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

A - 1

A - 2 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix B · Vilter Oil

Oil Analysis Report

Customer Name Customer Address
Evaluation:
The fluid is in good condition. Sample again in 6 months.

PRODUCT ANALYSIS REPORT No Action Required

Report Date:
Report Number:
Customer Comp. Mfr. Oil Type Serial Number Model Number Hrs. on Fluid Hrs. on Machine Sample Date Receive Date I.D. #

3/4/2013
*********
Customer Vilter VILTER-717 ****-*** VSM-601 6049 11239 Feb 21, 2013 Mar 01, 2013 *********

Physical Properties Results *
Sample Date (Lube Hours) Water by Karl Fischer (ppm) Viscosity 40 C (cSt) TAN Total Acid # ISO Code

Feb 21, 2013 (6049) 19.5
64.23 0.077 21/20/16

Oct 19, 2012 (4809) 147.7 64.47 0.106
21/19/16

Jul 26, 2010 (5190) 41.4
66.00 0.080 21/19/14

Spectrochemical Analysis
Wear Metals (ppm) Silver (Ag) Aluminum (Al) Chromium (Cr) Copper (Cu) Iron (Fe) Nickel (Ni) Lead (Pb) Tin (Sn) Titanium (Ti) Vanadium (V) Contaminant/Additive Metals (ppm) Barium (Ba) Calcium (Ca) Magnesium (Mg) Molybdenum (Mo) Sodium (Na) Phosphorus (P) Silicon (Si) Zinc (Zn)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Thank you for this opportunity to provide technical assistance to your company. If you have any questions about this report, please contact us

at 1-800-637-8628, or fax 1-989-496-2313 or email us at tslab@oil-services-lab.com

CC List

Accuracy of recommendations is dependent on representative oil samples and complete correct data on both unit and oil

* Property values should not be construed as specifications

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

B - 1

Appendix B · Vilter Oil

Storage Guidelines For Vilter B and Fl Type Lubricants
Vilter Type B and FL lubricants are ester-based fluids and are hygroscopic by nature. This means that they absorb water moisture from the surrounding environment. Compared to mineral based lubricants which are typically saturated with water at less than 100 PPM, ester based lubricants become saturated with water at approximately 2,500 PPM.
High water moisture levels cannot be tolerated in the refrigeration systems where ester based lubricants are utilized and require specific handling and storage guidelines, in addition to the normal precautions for system dehydration prior to system start-up. All Vilter lubricants are manufactured to meet strict requirements to ensure minimal water moisture content as shipped. The following guidelines are provided for the end-user of the equipment as a means to minimize the water content of lubricants in storage.
Guidelines
· Use a suitable dehydration process for the complete refrigeration system to ensure that the system as a whole is completely dry and water free. This can be accomplished by the use of vacuum pumps and checked by a vacuum gauge to ensure that a suitable micron value has been reached, and maintained.
· Store all lubricant containers in a dry environment. Do not expose the lubricant to the atmosphere by opening the container until the compressor sump or separator is ready to be charged.

· Keep the lubricant in its original container. Some plastic containers allow water moisture to pass through the container itself.
· If possible, use container sizes appropriate to the compressor charge to avoid leaving partially filled containers open for long period of times. Vilter B Type lubricant is available in 5 and 55 gallon containers.
· Refrigeration systems using ester based lubricants will require suitable high capacity moisture filter/ driers to maintain low total moisture content in the refrigerant and lubricant.
Compatibility & Misc.
· Vilter Type B lubricant has been extensively tested with many of the components in a refrigeration system. Elastomers, driers, etc. for use with HFCs have demonstrated no adverse effects when tested for hardness, swelling and brittleness.
· Vilter Type B lubricant cannot be used in conjunction with a mineral based oils are not miscible with HFCs. The performance of a refrigeration system is optimized when the lubricant is allowed to be miscible with the refrigerant to aid in the oil return to the compressor. If the oil used in an HFC refrigeration system does not provide oil return capability, the oil will tend to accumulate in the evaporator reducing the overall system capacity.
· CFC and HCFC refrigerants should not be used with Vilter Type B lubricant since these types of refrigerants greatly reduce the viscosity of ester based lubricants, resulting in inadequate compressor lubrication.

Table B-1 Oil Recommendations for Standard Warranty Coverage Single Screw Compressors Only

Vilter Oil Type ISO Grade
@ 100°F (cSt) Viscosity Index Spec. Gravity Density lbm/gal, 60°F Flash Point - °F Fire Point - °F Pour Point - °F Floc Point - °F Refrigerant Type

717 68 77 100 0.867 7.4 440 475 -38.2 -25 R-717

HCL-68 68 75.7 132
0.835 6.95 525 570 -67 NA R-717 R-22 R-1270

F-68 68 65.67 79 0.876 7.3 295 315 -31 -75 R-22

FL-100 100 76.4 115 0.96 8.26 558 633 Pending NA R-22

B-68 68 71 108 0.957 7.96 505 560 -45 NA R-134a R-507 R-404A R-407C R-410A

HC-68 68 67.2 168
0.989 8.25 425 465 -55 NA R-290

B - 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix B · Vilter Oil

Table B-2 Cross Reference Index

Vilter Part No. Oil Type Vilter Lube Type Container Size

Applications

2939A

HMO

R717

5 gallon pail R-717 (Ammonia)

2939AFG

HMO

717FG

55 gallon drum R-717 (Ammonia)

2939B

HMO

R717

5 gallon pail R-717 (Ammonia)

2939BFG

HMO

717FG

55 gallon drum R-717 (Ammonia)

3098A

PAG

HC-68

5 gallon pail R-290

3098B

PAG

HC-68

55 gallon drum R-290

3099A

PAG

HC-100

5 gallon pail Hydrocarbon

3100A

Naphthenic

VILTER D

5 gallon pail R-22, R-123 & R-414A

3100B

Naphthenic

VILTER D

55 gallon drum R-22, R-123 & R-414A

3101A

POE

FL-100

5 gallon pail R-22

3101B

POE

FL-100

55 gallon drum R-22

3103A

PAO

HCL-68

5 gallon pail Ammonia

3103B

PAO

HCL-68

55 gallon drum Ammonia

3103C

PAO

HCL-15

5 gallon pail R-717

3105A

BLEND

F-68

5 gallon pail R-22, R-123 & R-502

3105B

BLEND

F-68

55 gallon drum R-22, R-123 & R-502

3106A

POE

B-68

5 gallon pail All HFC applications (including R-134a, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A, R-507)

3106B

POE

B-68

55 gallon drum All HFC applications (including R-134a, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A, R-507)

3107A

POE

B-120

5 gallon pail R-134A, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A

3107B 3143A

POE PAO-100

B-120 METHANE

55 gallon drum R-134A, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A 5 gallon pail Hydrocarbon/natural gas, Landfill gas, Turbine feed gas

3143B

PAO-100

METHANE 55 gallon drum Hydrocarbon/natural gas, Landfill gas, Turbine feed gas

3143C

PAO-68

METHANE

5 gallon pail Hydrocarbon/natural gas, Landfill gas, Turbine feed gas

3143D 3143G 3143H 3143J

PAO-68 PAO-150 PAO-150 PAO-100

METHANE METHANE METHANE DIGESTER

55 gallon drum 5 gallon pail
55 gallon drum 5 gallon pail

Hydrocarbon/natural gas, Landfill gas, Turbine feed gas Hydrocarbon/natural gas, Landfill gas, Turbine feed gas Hydrocarbon/natural gas, Landfill gas, Turbine feed gas Hydrocarbon/natural gas, Landfill gas, Turbine feed gas

3143K

PAO-100

DIGESTER 55 gallon drum Hydrocarbon/natural gas, Landfill gas, Turbine feed gas

3339A

PAO

CO2 GAS

5 gallon pail CO2, CO

3339B

PAO

CO2 GAS

55 gallon drum CO2, CO

3456A

POE

B-32

5 gallon pail All HFC applications (including R-134a, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A)

3456B

POE

B-32

55 gallon drum All HFC applications (including R-134a, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A)

3595A

HMO

NH3-100-CI

5 gallon pail Ammonia

3595B

HMO

NH3-100-CI 55 gallon drum Ammonia

3603B

POE

B-68AWAF 55 gallon drum All HFC applications (including R-134a, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A, R-507)

3603C

POE

B-68AWAF

5 gallon pail All HFC applications (including R-134a, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A, R-507)

3603D

POE

B-100AWAF 55 gallon drum All HFC applications (including R-134a, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A, R-507)

3603E

POE

B-100AWAF

5 gallon pail All HFC applications (including R-134a, R-404A, R-407C, R-410A, R-507)

3636A 3636B 3643A

PAO

CO2

5 gallon pail Gas streams containing moisture, CO2, CO and/or H2S

PAO

CO2

55 gallon drum Gas streams containing moisture, CO2, CO and/or H2S

PAO

XG 105-100

5 gallon pail Hydrocarbon/natural gas

3643B

PAO

XG 105-100 55 gallon drum Hydrocarbon/natural gas

3653A

POE

POE-100

5 gallon pail Air Compressor Lubricant

3653B

POE

POE-100

55 gallon drum Air Compressor Lubricant

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

B - 3

B - 4 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix C · Vibration Measurements - Single Screw Compressor

Vibration Measurements - Single Screw Compressor
Scope
The vibration criteria provided applies to broad-band vibration measurements taken on the bearings and housing of the Single Screw compressors under steadystate operating conditions within the nominal operating speed range in addition to the piping and tubing on the compressor unit. They relate to both acceptance testing and operational monitoring. The evaluation criteria is intended to apply to both continuous and non-continuous monitoring situations. The scope does not address the diagnostic evaluation of the condition of the roller element bearings. The criteria are applicable only for the vibration produced by the machine itself and not for vibration which is transmitted to the machine set from external sources. Information used in this chapter was taken from ISO Standard 10816-3, Mechanical Vibration ­ Evaluation of Machine Vibration by Measurements on Non-Rotating Parts ­ Part 3, First Edition, 1998.
Measurement Procedures and Operational Conditions
Measurement Equipment
The measurement equipment shall be capable of measuring broad-band rms vibration with flat response over a frequency range of at least 10 Hz to 1000 Hz. Depending on the vibration criteria, this may require measurements

of displacement or velocity or combinations thereof.
Care should be taken to ensure that the measuring system is not influenced by environmental factors such as:
· temperature variations; · magnetic fields; · sound fields;
· power source variations;
· transducer cable length;
· transducer orientation.
Particular attention should be given to ensure that the vibration transducers are correctly mounted and that such mountings do not degrade the accuracy of the measurements.
Compressor Measurement locations
Measurements taken on the compressor will usually be taken on exposed parts that are normally accessible. Care shall be taken to ensure that measurements reasonably represent the vibration of the bearing housing and do not include any local resonances or amplification. The locations and directions of vibration measurements shall be such that they provide adequate sensitivity to the machine dynamic forces. Typically, this will require two radial measurement locations on each bearing cover on the gate rotor housing support and back plate (near the compressor shaft). Vertical and horizontal directions are preferred for Single Screw compressors. The specific locations and directions shall be recorded with the measurement.

Figure C-1. Compressor Bearing Vibration Measurement Location
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

C - 1

Appendix C · Vibration Measurements - Single Screw Compressor

Figure C-2. Main Rotor Cross-Section VSS/VSMC Compressors

Continuous and Non-continuous Monitoring
While it is common practice on large or critical machinery to have installed instrumentation for continuous online monitoring of vibration values at key measurement points, this is not necessarily carried out in industrial applications.
Changes in unbalance, bearing performance, alignment, etc. can be detected with sufficient reliability from periodic measurements with permanently installed or handheld instruments. The use of computers for trend analysis and warning against malfunctions is also becoming more common.

Operational Conditions
Measurements shall be carried out when the compressor has reached normal steady-state operating temperatures and with the machine running under specified conditions. If the measured vibration is greater than the acceptance criteria allowed and an excessive background vibration is suspected, measurements should be made with the machine shut down to determine the degree of external influence. If the vibration with the machine stationary exceeds 25% of the value measured when the machine is running, corrective action may be necessary to reduce the effect of the background vibration.

C - 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix C · Vibration Measurements - Single Screw Compressor

Evaluation
There are two evaluation criteria used to assess vibration severity on various classes of machines. One criteria considers the magnitude of observed broad-band vibration; the second considers changes in magnitude, irrespective of whether they are increases or decreases.
Criterion 1: Vibration Magnitude
This criterion is concerned with defining limits for vibration magnitude consistent with acceptable dynamic loads on the bearings and acceptable vibration transmission into the environment through the support structure and foundation. The maximum vibration magnitude observed at each bearing or pedestal is assessed against the evaluation zones for the support class. The evaluation zones have been established from international experience.
The following evaluation zones are defined to permit a qualitative assessment of the vibration of a given machine and provide guidelines on possible actions.
· Zone A: The vibration of newly commissioned machines would normally fall within this zone.

· Zone B: Machines with vibration within this zone are normally considered acceptable for unrestricted long-term operation.
· Zone C: machines with vibration within this zone are normally considered unsatisfactory for long term continuous operation. Generally, the machine may be operated for a limited period in this condition until a suitable opportunity arises for remedial action.
· Zone D: Vibration values within this zone are normally considered to be of sufficient severity to cause damage to the machine.
Numerical values assigned to the zone boundaries are not intended to serve as acceptance specifications, which shall be subject to agreement between VilterTM manufacturing and the customer. However, these values provide guidelines for ensuring that gross deficiencies or unrealistic requirements are avoided. In certain cases, there may be specific features associated with a particular machine which would require different zone boundary values (higher or lower) to be used

Figure C-3. Gaterotor Cross-Section VSS/VSR/VSMC Compressors
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

C - 3

Appendix C · Vibration Measurements - Single Screw Compressor

Evaluation Zone limits
The values for the zone boundaries given below are based on the maximum broad-band values of velocity and displacement when measurements are taken from two orthogonally oriented radial transducers. Therefore when using these tables, the higher of each of the values measured from the two transducers in each measurement plane should be used. When the maximum measured values of velocity and displacement are compared to the corresponding values in the table, the severity zone which is most restrictive shall apply.
Operational limits
For long-term operation, it is common practice to establish operational vibration limits. These limits take the form of ALARM and TRIP set points.

ALARM: To provide a warning that a defined value of vibration has been reached or a significant change has occurred, at which remedial action may be necessary. In general, if an ALARM situation occurs, operation can continue for a period while investigations are carried out to identify the reason for the change in vibration and define any remedial action.
TRIP: To specify the magnitude of vibration beyond which further operation of the machine may cause damage. If the TRIP value is exceeded, immediate action should be taken to reduce the vibration or the machine should be shut down.
Different operational limits, reflecting differences in dynamic loading and support stiffness, may be specified for different measurement positions and directions.

VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS ­ SINGLE SCREW COMPRESSOR*

RMS Displacement ZONE

RMS Velocity

Support

A

Class

B

mm 0-30 30-57

mils 0-1.15 1.15-2.25

mm/s 0-2.3 2.3-4.5

In/sec 0-.09 .09-.18

C

57-90 2.25-3.55 4.5-7.1 .18-.28

D Above 90 Above 3.55 Above 7.1 Above .28

*RMS= 0.707 X peak (sine wave only)

Table C-1. Vibration Zone Values

Setting of ALARMS
The ALARM values may vary considerably, up or down, for different machines. The values chosen will normally be set relative to a baseline value determined from experience for the measurement position or direction for that particular machine.
It is recommended that the ALARM value should be set higher than the baseline by an amount equal to 25% of the upper limit for zone B. If the baseline is low, the ALARM may be below zone C.
Where there is no established baseline (for example with a new machine) the initial ALARM setting should be based either on experience with other similar machines or relative to agreed acceptance values. After a period of time, the steady-state baseline value will be established and the ALARM setting should be adjusted accordingly.
It is recommended that the ALARM value should not

normally exceed 1.25 times the upper limit of zone B.
If the steady-state baseline changes (for example after a machine overhaul), the ALARM setting should be revised accordingly.
Setting of TRIPS
The TRIP values will generally relate to the mechanical integrity of the machine and be dependent on any specific design features which have been introduced to enable the machine to withstand abnormal dynamic forces. The values used will, therefore, generally be the same for all machines of similar design and would not normally be related to the steady-state baseline value used for setting ALARMS.
There may, however, be differences for machines of different designs and it is not possible to have clear guidelines for absolute TRIP values. In general, the TRIP value will be within zone C or D, but it is recommended that

C - 4

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix C · Vibration Measurements - Single Screw Compressor
the TRIP value should not exceed 1.25 times the upper limit of zone C.
Vibration limits For piping and Tubing
The piping and tubing on the compressor units must be supported with the appropriate brackets and supports to minimize the vibration levels. These brackets and supports should also be strategically placed to prevent the natural frequency from matching the normal operating speed. The typical goal is to have the natural frequency of an assembly to be at least 10% above or below the operating speed. In the case when a compressor is operated by a VFD (Variable Frequency Drive), there is a high probability that there will be an opportunity to match either the natural frequency of the assembly or it's 2nd or 3rd order since the compressor's speed will vary within a large range of RPM's.
The compressor unit should first be operated at either the normal operating speed or if it utilizes a VFD, through the operating range of speed. Visual observations of the vibration levels of all the piping and tubing should first be observed. After this initial survey, the vibration measurement equipment should be individually mounted or attached to each specific piece of piping or tubing as required in the location of what is perceived as the maximum amplitude or worse vibration.
While there are references which specifically allow higher levels of vibration for piping, the goals for the vibration levels of the piping and tubing on the compressor unit should still utilize the same criteria outlined in this standard. If possible, the vibration levels should be within the zone boundaries of Zone B or better. These values will ensure that the stress levels in the piping and tubing are acceptable for continuous operation. These values provide guidelines for ensuring that gross deficiencies or unrealistic requirements are avoided. In certain cases, there may be specific features associated with a particular compressor unit which would require different zone boundary values.
For compressors that are operated at a fixed speed, brackets and supports may be added or moved to reduce the vibration levels of the specific component. If the compressor is operated utilizing a VFD, a skip frequency should be inputted into the controls to ensure the compressor passes through the harmonic and that it operates either below or above the operating speed that matches the natural frequency of the specific component. It is not unusual to have three or four skip frequencies within the normal operating ranges of a compressor utilizing a VFD.
VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

C - 5

C - 6 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix D · Liquid Injection Valve Setup Instructions and Quick Start Guide
Appendix D Liquid Injection Valve Setup Instructions and ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve Quick Start Guide

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

D - 1

Appendix D · Liquid Injection Valve Setup Instructions and Quick Start Guide
Danfoss ICM/ICAD Valve Setup Instructions
The following items need to be setup in order for the valve to operate properly.
1. Press the "Circle" button on the valve. A value of "01" should be shown on the screen. 2. Press the "Circle" button. There should be a value of "1" shown. If not use the up/down arrows to change it to
the correct value. Press the "Circle" button when done. 3. Press the "Up" arrow button. A value of"02" should be shown on the screen. 4. Press the "Circle" button. There should be a value of "1" shown. If not use the up/down arrow buttons to change
it to the correct value. Press the "Circle" button when done. 5. Press the "Up" arrow button. A value of "03" should be shown on the screen. 6. Press the "Circle" button. There should be a value of "2" shown. If not, use the up/down arrow buttons to change
it to the correct value. Press the "Circle" button when done. 7. Press the "Up" arrow button until a value of "04" is shown on the screen. 8. Press the "Circle" button. There should be a value of "50" shown. If not, use the up/down arrow buttons to
change it to the correct value. Press the "Circle" button when done. 9. Press the "Up" arrow button until a value of "07" is shown on the screen. 10. Press the "Circle" button. There should be a value of "1" shown. If not, use the up/down arrow buttons to change
it to the correct value. Press the "Circle" button when done. 11. Press the "Up" arrow button until a value of "10" is shown on the screen. 12. Press the "Circle" button. Press the up/down arrow button to change the value to "11". Press the "Circle" button. 13. Press the "Up" arrow button until a value of "26" is shown on the screen. 14. Press the "Circle" button. Press the up/down arrow buttons to change the value to the correct valve that is on the
unit. The value number is listed on the valve. The values and valves are as follows: 0: No valve selected. Alarm A1 will become active. 1: ICM20 with ICAD 600 2: ICM25 with ICAD 600 3: ICM32 with ICAD 600 4: ICM40 with ICAD 900 5: ICM50 with ICAD 900 6: ICM65 with ICAD 900
15. Press the "Circle" button.
The valve is now ready to be used.

D - 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve

Installation, Programming, and Troubleshooting

Contents

Page Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Wiring the ICAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 ICAD Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 ICAD Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Troubleshooting
The Manual Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Service parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Common questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1



DKRCI.EI.HT0.A1. / 50H1639 

 Danfoss (USCO / MKS), 11- 006

ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve

Installation, Programming, and Troubleshooting

Care should be taken to protect the ICM function module while it is removed from the valve body.

3. Weld the valve body in line making sure the arrow on the valve body is pointing in the direction of flow.
4. Remove all debris from the valve body before re-installing the bonnet. 5. Install the bonnet/function module into the valve body.
a. For ICM 0, make sure that the removable orifice seat is installed in the valve body with the small O-ring between the orifice seat and body. Make sure the bonnet gasket is installed and in good condition.
b. For ICM 5 through ICM 65, check that the two O-rings on the bonnet and gasket located between the bonnet and valve body are installed and in good condition. A light coating of refrigerant oil on the bonnet O-rings will facilitate installation of the bonnet.
6. Install the four bolts and torque to the following specifications:

Valve body Nm ft lbs

ICM 0

50 37

ICM 5

80 59

ICM 3

80 59

ICM 40

90 66

ICM 50

100 74

ICM 65 110 81

7. Install the ICAD motor actuator on the ICM valve: a. The ICM valve must not be in its fully opened position while the ICAD motor is calibrated with the valve at a later step. Therefore, if the opening degree of the ICM valve was changed from the factory setting, it should be set to an opening degree between 0% and 75% using the manual magnet tool. To easily ensure correct positioning, turn the manual tool counter-clockwise until it is clear that it cannot be turned further. b. Make sure that the ICM adapter/valve stem and inner ICAD motor magnets are completely dry and free from any debris. c. For applications below freezing, the ICM adapter O-ring (position c in the diagram on page 3) must be removed, and Molycote G 4500 grease (supplied with ICAD motor) needs to be applied in the O-ring groove on the adapter and on the O-ring before it is re-installed on the ICM adapter. The Molycote grease ensures a good seal between the ICAD motor and the ICM adapter to prevent moisture from entering the ICAD magnets. d. Place the ICAD motor on the valve stem. e. Push the ICAD motor completely down to the identification ring on the valve stem and use a .5 mm hex key to tighten the set screws evenly so the ICAD motor is centered on the ICM adapter (torque: 3 Nm/ .5 lb-ft).

4

DKRCI.EI.HT0.A1. / 50H1639 

 Danfoss (USCO / MKS), 11- 006

ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve

Installation, Programming, and Troubleshooting

Wiring the ICAD Electrical Data
 Danfoss (USCO / MKS), 11 - 006

Note: The ICAD is powered by a 24 Volt DC power source.
There are two cables pre-mounted and connected to the ICAD motor actuator. Never try to open the ICAD motor because the special moisture seal will be damaged.
The power cable consists of 3 wires: · Green: (­) common (ground) · Brown: (+) positive from 4VDC power source · White: (+) positive from UPS/battery backup (optional)
The control cable consists of 7 wires: · Yellow: (­) common (ground) · Gray: (+) positive 4-0mA or 0-0mA input to control ICAD motor · Blue: (+) positive 4-0mA or 0-0mA output from ICAD for valve position feedback · Pink: (+) positive -10V or 0-10V input to control ICAD motor. Also used as a digital input with the yellow wire for on/off solenoid valve operation. · White: common alarm (digital NPN transistor output when combined with yellow wire) · Brown: indicates ICM is fully open (digital NPN transistor output when combined with yellow wire) · Green: indicates ICM is fully closed (digital NPN transistor output when combined with yellow wire)

Supply voltage is galvanically isolated from input and output wires.

Supply voltage 4 V d.c., +10% / -15% Load ICAD 600: 1. A
ICAD 900: .0 A

Fail safe supply Min. 19 V d.c. Load ICAD 600: 1. A
ICAD 900: .0 A

Anolog input - Current or Voltage Current
0/4 - 0 mA Load: 00 W Voltage 0/ - 10 V d.c. Load: 10 kW

Analog output 0/4 - 0 mA Load:  50 W

Digital input - Digital ON/OFF input by means of voltfree contact (Signal/Telecom relays with
gold-plated contacts recommended) ­ Voltage input used ON: contact impedance < 50 W) OFF: contact impedance > 100 kW

Digital output - 3 pcs. NPN transistor output

External supply: 5 - 4 V d.c. (same supply as for ICAD can be used, but please note that the

galvanically isolated system will then be spoiled).

Output load: 50 W

Load:

Max. 50 mA

DKRCI.EI.HT0.A1. / 50H1639

5

ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve

Installation, Programming, and Troubleshooting

Programming the ICAD

ICAD Parameters
Description ICM OD (Opening Degree)
Main Switch

Display name

Min.

-

0

¡01

1

Mode

¡02

1

Analog Input signal

¡03

1

Speed at ON/OFF and Modulating Mode

¡04

1

Automatic calibration

¡05

0

Analog Output signal

¡06

0

Fail safe

¡07

1

Digital Input function

¡09

1

Password Old Alarms OD at powercut

¡10

0

¡11

A1

¡12

0

ICM configuration

¡26

0

When the ICAD motor is first powered, the ICAD display will flash an A1 alarm. This means that the ICM valve size that is being used with the ICAD motor needs to be selected in parameter ¡26. Parameter ¡26 is password protected and will not appear in the parameter list until the user enters the password in parameter ¡10. The password is "11," and will allow the user to access parameter ¡26 where the appropriate valve size is selected. When the ICM valve size is selected, the ICAD will calibrate itself to the ICM valve and will then be ready for control by a 4-0mA signal. For most applications, this is the only programming that will need to be done if the ICAD is going to be controlled by a 4-0mA input.

Max.

Factory setting

Unit Comments

100

-

%

ICM valve Opening Degree is displayed during normal operation. Running display value (see ¡01, ¡05).

Internal main switch



1

-

1: Normal operation : Manual operation. Valve Opening Degree will be flashing. With the down arrow

and the up arrow push buttons the OD can be entered manually.

Operation mode



1

-

1: Modulating ­ ICM positioning according to Analog Input (see ¡03) : ON/OFF - operating the ICM valve like an ON/OFF solenoid valve controlled via

Digital Input. See also ¡09.

Type of Analog Input signal from external controller

1: 0 - 0 mA

4



-

: 4 - 0 mA

3: 0 - 10 V

4:  - 10 V

100

100

Speed can be decreased. Max. speed is 100 % Not active when ¡01 =  If ¡02 =  the display will indicate speed in display. Low, Med and High also % means ON/OFF operation. If ¡04 < = 33, Low is displayed 33 < If ¡04 < = 66, Med is displayed If ¡04 > = 67 High is displayed

Not active before ¡26 has been operated.

1

0

-

Always auto reset to 0. CA" will flash in the display during calibration, if Enter push button has been

activated for two seconds.

Type of A0 signal for ICM valve position





-

0: No signal 1: 0 - 0 mA

: 4 - 0 mA

Define condition at power cut when fail safe is installed.

1: Close valve

4

1

-

: Open valve

3: Maintain valve position

4: Go to OD given by ¡12



1

Define function when DI is ON (short circuited DI terminals) when ¡02 =  1: Open ICM valve (DI = OFF = > Close ICM valve) : Close ICM valve (DI = OFF = > Open ICM valve)

199

0

-

Enter number to access password protected parameters: ¡26 Password = 11

A99

-

-

Old alarms will be listed with the latest shown first. Alarm list can be reset by means of activating down arrow and up arrow at the same time for  seconds.

100

50

-

Only active if ¡07 = 4 If fail safe supply is connected and powercut occurs ICM will go to entered OD.

6

0

NB: Password protected. Password = 11 At first start up A1 will flash in display. Enter valve type 0: No valve selected. Alarm A1 will become active. 1: ICM0 with ICAD 600 : ICM5 with ICAD 600 3: ICM3 with ICAD 600 4: ICM40 with ICAD 900 5: ICM50 with ICAD 900 6: ICM65 with ICAD 900

 Danfoss (USCO / MKS), 11 - 006

DKRCI.EI.HT0.A1. / 50H1639

9

ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve Troubleshooting The Manual Tool
Service Parameters

Installation, Programming, and Troubleshooting

The manual tool should always be ordered with any ICM/ICAD assembly. This tool gives the user the ability to remove the ICAD actuator and manually rotate the valve in the open or close direction depending on need and application. When using the manual tool, a clockwise rotation will open the valve and a counter-clockwise rotation will close the valve.

NOTE: It is very important to remember that when rotating the valve manually you are changing the position from that in the actuator's memory. If power is removed from the actuator prior to using the manual tool, no problem will occur because, once the ICAD is powered up again, it will automatically recalibrate to the fully closed position before returning to the position in memory to which the control signal last set the valve. This recalibration will not occur if power is not removed from the ICAD prior to using the manual tool, and erroneous operation will likely occur. Always remove power before using the manual tool, and restore power afterward to ensure recalibration and trouble-free operation.

The user will be able to troubleshoot and determine many of the conditions and set points within the ICAD by accessing the Service Menu. A list of those service parameters follows below:

Service Menu

Description

Display name

Min.

Max.

Unit

Comments

OD %

¡50 0 100 % ICM valve Opening Degree

AI [mA]

¡51 0 0 mA Analog Input signal

AI [V]

¡52 0 10 V Analog Input signal

AO [mA]

¡53 0 0 mA Analog Output signal

DI

¡54 0 1 - Digital Input signal

DO Close

¡55 0 1 - Digital Output Closed status. ON when OD < 3 %

DO Open

¡56 0 1 - Digital Output Open status. ON when OD > 97 %

DO Alarm

¡57 0 1 - Digital Output alarm status. ON when an alarm is detected

MAS mP SW ver.

¡58 0 100 - Software version for MASTER Microprocessor

SLA mP SW ver. ¡59 0 100 - Software version for SLAVE Microprocessor

It is also possible to restore the original factory settings to the ICAD by the following procedure:
To restore factory settings: 1. Remove the power supply. . Activate down arrow and up arrow push buttons at the same time. 3. While holding the up and down arrow reconnect the power supply. 4. Release down arrow and up arrow push buttons. 5. When the display on ICAD is alternating between showing: CA and A1 the factory
resetting is complete.

10

DKRCI.EI.HT0.A1. / 50H1639 

 Danfoss (USCO / MKS), 11- 006

ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve Alarms
Troubleshooting Tips

Installation, Programming, and Troubleshooting

There are a number of alarms which are excellent indicators of improper installation or set-up:

Description

ICM alarm text

Comments

No valve type selected

A1 At start-up A1 and CA will be displayed

Controller fault

A2 Internal fault inside electronics

Input error

A3 Not applicable if ¡01 =  or ¡02 =  When ¡03 = 1 and AI >  mA When ¡03 =  and AI >  mA or AI <  mA When ¡03 = 3 and AI >1 V When ¡03 = 4 and AI >1 V or AI < 1 V

Low voltage of fail safe supply

A4 If 5 V d.c. < Fail safe supply < 18 V d.c.

Check Supply to ICAD

A5 If supply voltage < 18 V d.c.

Problem

Possible cause and solution

The valve is not working and an A1 is flashing in the display.

The ICM valve size was not selected in parameter ¡26. See the programming section on page 9.

The valve does not appear to be opening or closing properly

1. The ICAD was not mounted properly on the valve stem. Solution: Check to make sure that the ICAD was mounted evenly on the ICM valve
. The ICAD is not receiving a proper input signal. Solution: Use the service parameters (¡51 for a mA input or ¡52 for a voltage input) to check the input signal that the ICAD is receiving.

The valve position feedback signal is not working when using customer supplied controller/PLC

1. A power supply was installed in the 4-0mA/0-0mA feedback loop. The ICAD motor actuator supplies the power for the 4-0mA/0-0mA feedback loop. Solution: Remove any power source that may be supplied to the feedback loop.
. Wiring problem. Solution: Check the service parameter ¡53 to see what the ICAD is outputting. If this does not reveal anything, check the current output (yellow and blue wires in ICAD control cable) with an ammeter.
3. The feedback output signal was turned off in parameter ¡06. Solution: Check to make sure the setting in parameter ¡06 is correct.

For all other problems, contact Danfoss.

 Danfoss (USCO / MKS), 11 - 006

DKRCI.EI.HT0.A1. / 50H1639

11

ICM/ICAD Motorized Valve Common Questions

Installation, Programming, and Troubleshooting
What happens in the event of a power failure? The ICAD will remain in the position it is in when power is lost. There are two ways to address this condition:
· Add a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) to the power wiring. This is easily accomplished with the green and white wires in the power cable. A UPS is available from Danfoss. The UPS can provide service for up to 9 ICAD 600's or up to 6 ICAD 900's.
Note: The UPS is not a continuous power supply. It is used to change the valve position (usually to close the valve) in the event of a power failure. Therefore, the system is not to be run in the UPS mode.
· Add a solenoid valve in front of the ICM. This is a very simple solution provided that there is no issue associated with the additional pressure drop through the solenoid valve.
How much power do I need to supply to the ICAD? The total power required depends on both the ICAD size and the number of ICAD's powered by the DC power supply. The power for each ICAD is:
· For the ICAD 600 (used on ICM 0, 5, and 3), the power requirement is approximately 30 W
· For the ICAD 900 (used on ICM 40, 50, and 65), the power requirement is approximately 50 W
How can I monitor the valve position remotely? The control wiring provides for a 4 to 0 mA or 0 to 0 mA signal output (blue and yellow wires). This signal can be sent to:
· A remote display · A PLC or PC · Another ICAD motor to give the same opening position

Danfoss · Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Division · 7941 Corporate Drive · Baltimore, MD 136 Ph 410-931-850 · Fax 410-931-856 · E-mail: baltimore@danfoss.com · Internet: www.danfoss.com/North_America

1

DKRCI.EI.HT0.A1. / 50H1639 

 Danfoss (USCO / MKS), 11- 006

Appendix E · Liquid Injection Valve Station ICF 20-40 Installation Guide
Appendix E Liquid Injection Valve Station ICF 20-40
Installation Guide

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

E - 1

027R9782
ICM
027R9782

Installation Guide
Valve Station ICF 20-40
ICF xx-4

Direction and position ICF xx-6

ICF xx-4 / ICF xx-6 with ICM
ICM

ICM

Fig. 1a

Fig. 1b

Welding

TIG/MIG/SMAW welding

Inlet and outlet stop valves must be closed all the time before commissioning of the installation in ordre to prevent rust formations in the valve. The stop valves are closed when delivered from the factory. ICF must be cooled during the welding (e.g. by means of a wet cloth).

Fig. 1c
Other welding methods
Remove all parts before welding. When the valve is assembled make sure that some rust protective oil is supplied in the valve. Before commissioning inlet and outlet valves must be closed at all time.

ICM
Danfoss M27H0049_1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

1

For both ICF 20 and ICF 25-40 with ICM and ICFE 25-40 Please Note: When used in CO2, the o-rings (see fig. 4) on the ICM and ICFE 25-40 modules can swell (grow). At service it is recommend that new o-rings are installed, before the ICM and ICFE 25-40 function modules are reinstalled in the ICV valve body.

Service and maintenance

2a

4

o-rings

2b

12

Fig. 4
Fig. 5 2

Tightening torques For the 4 bolts in all ICF modules

ICF 20:

ICF 25-40:

50 Nm (36 ft lbs) 80 Nm (58 ft lbs)

50 Nm (36 ft lbs) 50 Nm (36 ft lbs)

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

ICF 20
ICFS - stop valve module ICFR - manual regulating valve module
ICFN - stop/check valve module

ICFO - manual opening module

Before remounting the cap on the modules ICFS (stop valve module), ICFR (manual regulating valve module) or ICFN (stop/check valve module) please ensure that the gasket is present in the cap. Then tighten the cap with 16 Nm (12 ft lbs).

ICF 25 - 40
ICFS - stop valve module ICFR - manual regulating valve module
ICFN - stop/check valve module

ICFE - solenoid valve module

Packing gland If the packing gland is leaking, tighten it carefully with a wrench.
Do not apply too much force.
Danfoss recommends that you conduct a stepwise tightening of the packing gland. For each turn check for possible leaks.

Before remounting the cap on the modules ICFS (stop valve module), ICFR (manual regulating valve module) or ICFN (stop/check valve module) please ensure that the gasket is present in the cap. Then tighten the cap with 24 Nm (18 ft lbs).

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

3

Operating the manual opener on ICFE 25 solenoid module
To force open the solenoid by the manual stem turn it counter clockwise full way up. (Manual mode) To operate the solenoid in automatic mode, turn the manual stem clockwise until the locking ring stops. Do not force the spindle further. If the locking ring is damaged or removed the spindle will start to leak. The valve cannot be forced closed by the manual stem.
ICFE 25-40 solenoid valve module Locking ring
Turn spindle counter clockwise to open
Operating the manual opener on ICFE 20H solenoid valve module
Remove the cap on the side of the ICFE 20H At 9 o'clock position the manual opener is disabled (not active) To force the ICFE 20H solenoid to open use a 5 mm Allen key and turn it clockwise to 3 o'clock position.

Manual opener disabled

Position for forced open

4

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

ICF 20-4

Module location
In order to supply the ICF valve station best suited for liquid lines and hot gas lines certain function modules are dedicated to specific module ports.

0, 2 or 4 optional side ports (up to 6 on request)

Function

M1 M2 M3 M4

ICFS 20 - Stop valve module

ICFR 20A - Manual regulating valve module

ICFF 20 - Filter module

ICFE 20 - Solenoid valve module

ICFE 20H - Solenoid valve module

ICFA 10 - Electronic expansion valve module

ICFO 20 - Manual opening module

ICFC 20 - Check valve module

ICFN 20 - Stop/check valve module

ICM 20-A, B or C - Motor valve module

ICFB 20 - Blank top cover

location not possible

Fig. 6
ICF 20-6

In order to supply the ICF valve station best suited for liquid lines and hot gas lines certain function modules are dedicated to specific module ports.

Function

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6

ICFS 20 - Stop valve module

ICFR 20A - Manual regulating valve module

ICFF 20 - Filter module

ICFE 20 - Solenoid valve module

ICFE 20H - Solenoid valve module

ICFA 10 - Electronic expansion valve module

ICFO 20 - Manual opening module

ICFC 20 - Check valve module

ICFN 20 - Stop/check valve module

ICM 20-A, B or C - Motor valve module

ICFB 20 - Blank top cover

location not possible

0, 4 or 6 optional side ports (up to 10 on request)

Fig. 7

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

5

Danfoss M27H0004_1

ICF 25-4  40-4

Module location

In order to supply the ICF valve station best suited for liquid lines and hot gas lines certain function modules are dedicated to specific module ports.

Function

M1 M2 M3 M4

ICFS 25-40 - Stop valve module

ICFR 25-40 A or B - Manual regulating valve module

ICFF 25-40 - Filter module

ICFE 25-40 - Solenoid valve module

ICFC 25-40 - Check valve module

ICFN 25-40 - Stop/check valve module

ICM 25-A or C - Motor valve module

ICFB 25-40 - Blank top cover

ICFW 25-40 - Welding module, 25DIN

location not possible

0, 2 or 4 optional side ports (up to 6 on request)

Fig. 8
ICF 25-6  40-6

In order to supply the ICF valve station best suited for liquid lines and hot gas lines certain function modules are dedicated to specific module ports.

Function

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6

ICFS 25-40 - Stop valve module

ICFR 25-40 A or B - Manual regulating valve module

ICFF 25-40 - Filter module

ICFE 25-40 - Solenoid valve module

ICFC 25-40 - Check valve module

ICFN 25-40 - Stop/check valve module

ICM 25-A or C - Motor valve module

ICFB 25-40 - Blank top cover

ICFW 25-40 - Welding module, 25DIN

location not possible

0, 4 or 6 optional side ports (up to 10 on request)

Fig. 9 6

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

ICFS 20 stop valve module

The function modules - ICF 20 ICFR 20 manual regulating valve module

ICFF 20 filter module

1. Spindle 2. Thread part 3. AL-gasket 4. Bonnet 5. Hex-head bolt 6. Flange 7. Gasket
1. Gasket 2. Bonnet 3. Hex-head bolt 4. Flange 5. Gasket 6. Filter element 7. Plug 8. Plug 1/4" RG or 3/8" NPT

ICFE 20 solenoid valve module

1. Armature tube 2. Armature tube nut 3. Flange 4. Gasket 5. Hex-head bolt 6. Seat

ICFO 20 manual opening module
1. Seal cap 2. Gland nut 3. Seal cap gasket 4. Sealing ring 5. Rubber gasket 6. Spindle 7. Hex-head bolt 8. Flange

1. Spindle 2. Thread part 3. AL-gasket 4. Bonnet 5. Hex-head bolt 6. Flange 7. Gasket 8. Seat
ICFC 20 check valve module
1. Bonnet 2. Hex-head bolt 3. Flange 4. Gasket
ICFE 20H solenoid valve module 1. Piston
3. Piston ring 4. Bonnet cylindre 5. Manual opener 6. Armature tube 7. Armature tube nut 8. Gasket
ICM 20 A, 20 B or 20 C motor valve module
1. Adapter 2. Hex-head bolt 3. O-ring 4. Bonnet 5. Gasket 6. Seat

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

7

ICFN 20 stop/check valve module

The function modules - ICF 20
ICFB 20 blank top cover module
1. Hex-head bolt 2. Flange 3. Gasket

1. Spindle 2. Thread part 3. AL-gasket 4. Bonnet 5. Hex-head bolt 6. Flange 7. Gasket
ICFF 20E extended filter module
1. Dirt protection plug 2. Bonnet 3. Hex-head bolt M12x80 4. Flange 5. Gasket 6. Filter element 7. Plug 3/8" NPT 8. Filter adaptor
ICFS 25-40 stop valve module

ICFA 10 Electronic expansion valve
1. Armature tube 2. Armature tube nut 3. Hex-head bolt 4. Flange 5. Gasket 6. Adaptor
ICFR 25- 40 A or B manual regulating valve module

1. Spindle 2. Thread part 3. O-ring 4. Bonnet 5. Hex-head bolt 6. Flange 7. Gasket

1. Spindle 2. Thread part 3. O-ring 4. Bonnet 5. Hex-head bolt 6. Flange 7. Gasket

8

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

ICFF 25-40 filter module

The function modules - ICF 25-40 ICFC 25-40 check valve module

1. Al gasket 2. Bonnet 3. Hex-head bolt 4. Flange 5. Gasket 6. Filter element 7. Plug 1/4" RG or 3/8" NPT

1. Bonnet 2. Hex-head bolt 3. Flange 4. Gasket

ICFE 25-40 solenoid valve module

ICM 25 A or 20 B motor valve module

1

2

1. Armature tube

3

2. Armature tube nut

4

3. Bonnet

5

4. Gasket

6

5. Hex-head bolt

6. Seat

ICFN 25-40 stop/check valve module

1. Adapter 2. Hex-head bolt 3. O-ring 4. Bonnet 5. Gasket 6. Seat
ICFB 25-40 blank top cover module

1. Spindle 2. Thread part 3. O-ring 4. Bonnet 5. Hex-head bolt 6. Flange 7. Gasket
ICFF 25-40E extended filter module

1. Hex-head bolt 2. Flange 3. Gasket
ICFW 25-40 Welding module 25 DIN
1. Hex-head bolt 2. Flange 3. Gasket 4. Weld connection

1. Dirt protection plug 3/8" NPT
2. Bonnet 3. Hex-head bolt M12x140 4. Flange 5. Gasket 6. Filter element 7. Plug 3/8" NPT

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

9

ENGLISH
Installation
Refrigerants Applicable to HCFC, non flammable HFC, R717 (Ammonia) and R744 (CO2).
The use of ICF valve stations with flammable hydrocarbons is not recommended.
The ICF is only recommended for use in closed circuits. For further information please contact Danfoss.
Temperature range ­60/+120°C (­76/+248°F)
Pressure range The ICF is designed for a max. working pressure of 52 bar g (754 psi g).
Technical data The ICF can be used in suction, liquid, hotgas and liquid/vapor lines. The ICF are available with 4 or 6 function modules. The ICF regulates the flow of the medium by modulation or on/off function, depending on function modules installed on the ICF.
Regulating range Dependent on the chosen type and combination of modules installed in the valve.
Installation The ICF must be installed according to fig. 1. The ICF must be installed with the arrow in the direction of the flow).
The ICF will be delivered with all the function modules fully assembled. The modules can be taken off for service or inspection and may be rotated 4 x 90° in relation to the valve body upon installation.
The ICF may be fitted with a spindle for manual opening of the solenoid valve.
The ICF is designed to withstand a high internal pressure. However, the piping system should be designed to avoid liquid traps and reduce the risk of hydraulic pressure caused by thermal expansion.
It must be ensured that the ICF is protected from pressure transients like "liquid hammer" in the system.

The ICF valves are delivered with closed stop valves. During Gas welding the modules must be removed. Avoid welding debris and dirt in the valve body and the function module. The housing must be free from stresses (external loads) after installation. The ICF must not be mounted in systems where the outlet side of the ICF is open to atmosphere. The outlet side of the ICF must always be connected to the system or properly capped off, for example with a welded-on end plate.
Surface protection and identification The external surface is zinc-chromated to provide corrosion protection according to EN 12284:2003 8.13. The ZincChromatization does not cover the welding connections. After installation has been completed the external surface of the valve must be protected against corrosion with a suitable top coating. Protection of the ID label when painting the ICF is recommended.
Precise identification of the ICF is made via the ID label on each of the 4 or 6 function modules.
Maintenance
Service The ICF valve stations are easy to service. Do not open the ICF while the it is still under pressure.
Debris blocking the bolt hole will need cleaning. Upon opening and removal of the function modules: - Check that the O-rings on the function
module has not been damaged. A valve with a damaged o-ring might not modulate according to the specification.
For both ICF 20 and ICF 25 - 40 with ICM
Please Note: When used in CO2, the o-rings (see fig.4) on the ICM and ICFE 25-40 modules can swell (grow). At service it is recommend that new o-rings are installed, before the ICM function module is reinstalled in the ICF valve body.

- On ICM 20 motor valve modules check that the PEEK seat has not been damaged or scratched. If damaged or scratched; replace the PEEK seat.
Assembly Remove any dirt from the housing before the ICF is assembled. - Check that all channels in the ICF
are free of particles or similar debris. If possible, apply some refrigeration oil to ease the insertion of the modules and to protect the O-rings.
Tightening (fig. 5) Tighten the top cover with a torque wrench, to the values indicated in the table. Use only original Danfoss parts, including O-rings and gaskets for replacement.
Materials of new parts are certified for the relevant refrigerant.
In cases of doubt, please contact Danfoss.
Drawings are only for illustration, not for dimensioning or construction. Danfoss accepts no responsibility for errors and omissions.
Danfoss Industrial Refrigeration reserves the right to make changes to products and specifications without prior notice.

Welding The ICF valve station can be welded by using either TIG/MIG/SMAW welding (fig. 2) or gas welding (fig. 3).
Attention! It is not necessary to remove any of the modules before TIG/MIG/SMAW welding; however, it must be ensured that the valve is cooled during the welding ( e. g. by wet cloth) and that the ICF is protected against weld splatter. Inlet and outlet stop valves must be closed all the time before commissioning in order to protect ICF against rust formations.

- Check that the piston and cylinder is free of scratches and look for wear marks. If the wear is excessive the function module should be replaced to prevent false pilot signal around the piston ring.
- Check that the movement of the cylinder and valve seat is free and with low friction.
- If the teflon valve plate has been damaged, the function module must be replaced.

10

DKRCI.PI.FT0.C4.02 / 520H5450

© Danfoss A/S (AC-MCI/MWA), 2012-12

E - 12 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix F · Hand-Held Slide Valve Calibration Tool
Appendix F Hand-Held Slide Valve Calibration Tool

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

F - 1

Appendix F · Hand-Held Slide Valve Calibration Tool

Hand-Held Slide Valve Calibration Tool By VilterTM
The Slide Valve Calibration Tool allows the operator to perform the calibration procedure of Vilter´s slide valve actuators (VPN 25972D) single-handedly, while standing at the actuator, without multiple trips to the panel screen, or the need of another person at the panel.

How It Works
The calibration tool replaces the power cable that feeds the actuator during normal operation, and provides 115 volts to the actuator motor using the CW and CCW push buttons. The regular control cable which provides 24 volts DC to the actuator must be connected at all times. The greatest advantage from this set up is that the operator can perform the whole calibration procedure in front of the compressor, and therefore can easily detect if the actuator is driving the slide valves up against the mechanical stop inside the compressor.
Calibration Procedure
1. Look for the motor control cable on the actuator (connector J2), and disconnect it. Connect the calibration tool´s turck connector to the actuator.
2. Remove the screws securing the actuator cover to the actuator assembly, and carefully lift the actuator cover and tilt it towards connectors. Raise the cover high enough to attain access to the blue calibration button and be able to see the red LED on the top of assembly.
3. Press "CW" or "CCW" on the calibration tool to move the slide valve and check for the correct rotation, see the Increase Direction for Single Screw Compressors Table on the next page to establish which one is the increase button and which one the decrease button for your compressor model.
Red LED
Blue Calibrate Button

For use in non-hazardous locations
Features
The calibration procedure may be performed directly at the actuator, so the operator can immediately detect when the actuators start to slow down and reach
the mechanical stop Using this tool bypasses the standard calibration procedure which requires several trips between the actuator and the control panel, or to have two opera-
tors available
Electrical Rating of 125V and 5A (not fuse protected)
Light and easy to move around the compressors room
Pendant switch for easy access and comfortable handling
4. Quickly press and release the blue push button on the actuator once. This places the actuator in calibration mode. The red LED will start flashing rapidly.
5. Use the decrease button on the calibration tool to drive the slide valve to its minimum "mechanical stop" position. Release the decrease button when the slowing of the motor rotation and a winding sound from the actuator motor is noted.
6. Press and hold down on the photo-chopper shaft to disengage the brake slowly, releasing tension from the motor mount. Use the increase button to pulse the actuator to where the slide is just off of the mechanical stop and there is no tension on the motor shaft.

F - 2

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

Appendix F · Hand-Held Slide Valve Calibration Tool

Slide Valve Increase Direction for Single Screw Compressors Table

Compressor Model Number
151 VSM / VSG 152 VSM / VSG 181 VSM / VSG 182 VSM / VSG 201 VSM / VSG 202 VSM / VSG 291 VSS / VSSH / VSSG 301 VSM / VSG 341 VSS / VSSH / VSSG 361 VSM / VSG 401 VSM / VSG 451 VSS / VSSH / VSSG 501 VSM / VSG 601 VSM / VSG 601 VSS / VSSH / VSSG 701 VSM / VSG 751 VSS / VSG 791 VSS/VSH/VSG 891 VSS/VSH/VSG 901 VSS / VSG 1051 VSS / VSH / VSG 1201 VSS / VSH / VSG 1301 VSS / VSH / VSG 1501 VSS / VSG 1551 VSS / VSG 1801 VSS / VSG 1851 VSS / VSG 2101 VSS / VSG 2401 VSS / VSG 2601 VSS / VSG 2801 VSS / VSG 3001 VSS / VSG

Capacity Slide Valve
CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CCW CCW CW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW

Volume Slide Valve
CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CCW CCW CW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW

7. Quickly press and release the blue button on the actuator again. The red LED will now flash at a slower rate, indicating that the minimum slide valve position (zero position) has been set.
8. Use the increase button on the calibration tool to drive the slide to its maximum "mechanical stop" position. Release the increase button when the slowing of the motor rotation and a winding sound from the actuator motor is noted.
9. Press and hold down on the photo-chopper shaft to disengage the brake slowly, releasing tension from the motor mount. Use the decrease button to pulse the actuator to where the slide is just off of its mechanical stop and there is no tension on the motor shaft.

10. Quickly press and release the blue button on the actuator one more time. The red LED will stop flashing. The actuator is now calibrated and knows the minimum and maximum positions of the slide valve it controls.
11. Disconnect the calibration tool's turck from the actuator, and connect the motor control cable on the actuator (connector J2).

Order Vilter Slide Valve Calibration Tool Using VPN 75002

General Inquiries 5555 S. Packard Ave. Cudahy, WI 53110 United States Phone: 414-744-0111 Fax: 414-744-3483 Web: www.Vilter.com

Customer Service Phone: 1-800-862-2677 Service.Vilter@emerson.com
Parts Parts.Vilter@Emerson.com
For more product information and to order online visit: VPI.Emerson.com

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

F - 3

F - 4 / Blank

VSS/VSR/VSM/VSH/VSSH Compressor · Installation, Operation and Service Manual · Emerson · 35391S

About Vilter
Vilter is a technology leader in energy-efficient, environmentally conscious solutions in its industry. The 150-year history of the Vilter brand tells a rich story of perseverance and drive to cultivate continuous innovation within the industrial refrigeration and gas compression industries. Vilter offers unprecedented efficiency, productivity and reliability in cooling, recovery, and compression. It combines bestin-class technology with proven engineering and design to create quality products and latest solutions for customers worldwide.
About Emerson
Vilter Manufacturing LLC is a business segment of Emerson, a global leader in bringing technology and engineering together to provide innovative solutions for customers in industrial, commercial and consumer markets around the world. Our Emerson Automation Solutions business helps process, hybrid, and discrete manufacturers maximize production, protect personnel and the environment while optimizing their energy and operating costs. Our Emerson Commercial and Residential Solutions business helps ensure human comfort and health, protect food quality and safety, advance energy efficiency, and create sustainable infrastructure. For more information please visit Emerson.com
Emerson.com/Vilter
Vilter Manufacturing LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications without notice. 35391S Rev. 09A (05/21) Emerson and Vilter are trademarks of Emerson Electric Co. or one of its affiliated companies. ©2021 Emerson Climate Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.



References

Adobe PDF Library 15.0 Adobe InDesign 16.2 (Windows)